JPH07334132A - Display control method of advertising media - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To simplify the input of an original design and the input and the change of blinking time series data when the blinking of a neon sign is designed by utilizing a computer in a neon industry and an advertising agent, etc. CONSTITUTION:The display control method of advertising media is composed of a processing step for blinking time series program inputting blinking graphic data in unit coordinates whose blinking unit of graphic is specified, outputting blinking time series data changing the blinking display in time series and outputting blinking time series transfer data changing simulation display in time series, a processing step for simulation display control program inputting the blinking graphic data in unit coordinates and executing simulation display and a processing step for blinking display instrument control program inputting blinking time series data or the blinking time series data and the blinking graphic data in unit coordinates and outputting blinking display instrument control data for controlling the blinking display instrument or blinking sequence data recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the blinking display instrument.

Description

Detailed Description of the Invention

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a display control method of an advertising medium for efficiently designing an advertising medium such as a neon sign and a lightning board.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art When designing a blinking neon sign by using a computer in the neon industry, an advertising agency, etc., in the procedure for creating the display control of the advertising medium of the prior art, the pattern changes in time series. There is almost no technology for continuous processing (generation, editing, recording and printing) of coordinate graphics and images for advertisements that are performed by a computer.
There was no means to electronically generate coordinate graphic data that could be used directly for execution.

First, the terms of the data processing computer and the data processing used in the procedure for creating the display control of the advertising medium according to the related art or the present invention will be described. A. Data Processing Computer FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a computer main body CPU and input / output / external storage devices for normal data processing. In the figure, a computer main body CPU includes an input device I externally connected to a main memory device MM, a calculation device OR, and a control device CT.
A PD, an output device OPD, and a display device DSP are formed. In the main memory device MM, a collection of control programs and instructions, an input data area (input buffer), an output data area (output buffer), a display screen area, and others. Software including a data area (internal constants, variables, tables, etc.), a data area generated by a compiler, and the like is stored. The external devices of the input device and the output device externally connected to the computer CPU are the input device IPD and the auxiliary storage device A.
M, an output device OPD, a display device DSP, and the like.

B. Input / output information terms * B01 Plane or three-dimensional tangible object ... Handwritten drawing (sketch), drafting drawing, printed matter, photograph, actual thing, etc. * B02 Design ... Shape or shape that can include attributes such as color, pattern, line type, line width A combination of these shapes (hereinafter referred to as "form"), a paper expressing the concept of the form to be edited or the form * B03 Physical pattern information ... Information specifying the pattern of the flat or three-dimensional tangible object to be edited. * B04 Graphic drawing ... Paper that is expressed by editing physical design information (for example, FIG. 2) * B05 Coordinate graphic ... Design or graphic drawing having coordinate data * B05a Input coordinate graphic ... Design having coordinate data * B05b output Coordinate graphic: Graphic drawing with coordinate data * B06 Coordinate graphic data: Coordinate graphic element that specifies the coordinate graphic (color, pattern, line type, line width and segment Ment)
Code data consisting of * B06a Input coordinate graphic data ... Code data before editing specifying a coordinate graphic [Coordinate graphic data before editing including only conventional CAD attributes (described later)] [Conventional coordinate graphic data ... For example, CAD Data, Figure 4
Data of *] B06b Output coordinate figure data ... Code data after editing specifying the coordinate figure [Edited coordinate figure data including only conventional CAD attributes (to be described later)] * B07 Blinking unit data ... Blinking unit of figure Of the blinking unitization element (unit number, unit note, group number, group note, scene, etc.) that specifies the code (for example, FIG. 79) [code of the blinking unitization element including the CAD attribute of the present invention (described later)] Data] * B08 Blinking unit coordinate graphic data ... Code data composed of unit coordinate graphic data (for example, FIG. 80) and blinking unitized data (for example, FIG. 79) * B09 image ... of pixels arranged in rows and columns An image that is a collection and is electronically represented by converting physical design information, graphic drawings, or coordinate graphics

* B10 image data: image data specifying unprocessed or processed coordinate image * B10a input image data: image data specifying unprocessed image For example, computer graphic (CG) data * B10b output image data Image data that specifies the processed image * B10c Image data for video ... (Image display) Image data to output RGB dot data to a video storage device through a video interface (described later) * B10d Edit screen image data ... Displayed on the screen during editing Data that has been processed into image data * B11 Flashing time-series data ... Data for changing the display of one or more coordinate figures in time series * B12 Flashing time-series transmission data ... Flashing time-series data in time series Data to be divided and transmitted (for each scene) Data for changing simulation display in time series] * B13 Figure blinking sequence data: Data for executing blinking display of figure blinking device * B14 Panel blinking sequence data: Data for performing blinking display of panel blinking device * B15 Figure blinking Display device control data: Graphic flashing display Control data for controlling the blinking of the control device, such as the number of times the control device blinks, the number of repetitions, and pause * B16 Panel blinking display device control data: Panel blinking display Data for controlling blinking execution such as number of times, pause, etc. * B17 Screen display RGB dot data ... Data for executing display simulation * B20 Advertising medium ... Visually transmitting relatively simple figures or characters from a relatively long distance A collection of multiple light sources for 21 display graphic ... graphic is displayed in the advertising media * B26 unit coordinate graphic data ... coordinate the graphic data B06
(For example, FIG. 4) Code data of a coordinate figure obtained by unitizing the blinking unitized data B07 (for example, FIG. 80) * B27 Blinking unit light source data (dot data) ... Dot data to control * B28 Lighting color data ... Code data to control the lighting color of multiple unit light sources that display display figures

C. Input / output and storage device terms * C01 Coordinate input device: A device that manually inputs physical pattern information and converts it into image data or coordinate graphic data. For example, keyboard, mouse, light pen, digitizer (tablet) * C02 coordinates Graphic storage device ... Device for storing coordinate graphic data For example, floppy disk, magnetic disk, magneto-optical disk, semiconductor storage device, optical disk, magnetic tape * C03 Coordinate graphic output device ... Device for displaying coordinate graphic data [printing device (C17 ), Drawing device (C18), display (C20)] * C04 Image input device ... Device for converting physical pattern information into input image data, for example, image scanner, video camera * C05 Image storage device ... Electronically image data Storage device For example, optical disk, magneto-optical disk, magnet Tape, magnetic disk, semiconductor memory device, floppy disk * C06 image output device ... device for displaying the image data [hardcopy device (C19), display (C2
0)] * C07 Blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device ... A device that stores blinking unitized data B07 or blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 * C08 Blinking unit coordinate figure data output device ... Blinking unitized data B07 or blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 output device [printing device (C17), plotting device (C1)
8), display (C20)] * C09 blinking time series data storage device ... A device for storing blinking time series data B11

* C10 Blinking time-series data output device: device for outputting blinking time-series data B11 [printing device (C1
7)] * C11 sequence data storage device ... device for storing sequence data * C11a graphic blinking sequence data storage device ... device for storing graphic blinking sequence data * C11b panel blinking sequence data storage device ... device for storing panel blinking sequence data * C11f Video storage device For example, an image storage device that stores blinking image data input from a video camera, an image storage device that stores image (simulation display) data through a video interface * C13 Sequence data output device ... A device that outputs sequence data [Printing device (C17), hard copy device (C19)] * C14 Flashing time-series transmission data storage device ... Device storing flashing time-series transmission data * C15 Time-series graphic display program storage device * C17 mark Apparatus (printer) ... data printing to device * C18 PLOTTER a (plotter) ... and outputs the data device * C19 hardcopy device ... Copying image data of the display screen device * C20 Display

* C21 First communication means: means for transmitting blinking time-series transmission data from the first computer to the second computer (FIGS. 27 and 28) * C22 Second communication means: first computer From the second computer to the blinking unit coordinate figure data (FIG. 28) * C23 Sequence program generation device: Sequence program generation device * C24 Sequence program storage medium: Sequence program storage medium * C26 Simulation Display execution device: For example, display (C20) * C27 Graphic blinking display device: Assembly of linear light sources for dividing and displaying graphics or characters into linear light sources (segments), for example, one or more Neon sign of * C28 Panel blinking display device ... ) Light source assembly of punctiform light sources for display is divided for example, a collection of lightning Board (LED), light bulb, CRT
(Cathode tube), VFD (fluorescent display tube), PDP (plasma display), EL (electroluminescence), LE
D (light emitting diode), ECD (electronic display), LCD (liquid crystal display), ECD (electromagnetic reversal display), single (one or more) neon sign processed to look like dots from a distance Multiple light sources * C29 Graphic blinking display control device: Control device that controls the graphic blinking display device control data according to the control data * C30 Panel blinking display control device: Control that controls the panel blinking display device according to the panel flashing display device control data Device * C31 Medium data display control device ... Control device that controls blinking display device according to data of sequence program storage medium * C32 Blinking unit light source ... Graphic or character is divided into lines (segments) or dots (dots) and displayed One or more light sources that blink simultaneously for Flannel ... A plurality of blinking unit light sources arranged in a panel

D. Information processing term * D01 Software: A means for organically combining a single function or a single program to execute multiple processes Examples of software Paint software, CAD software Example of program Flashing unitized CAD program, when flashing Series program, simulation display control program Functions included in conventional paint software ... Paint function,
Image input function, file function, hard copy function Functions included in conventional CAD software ... CAD function, file function, plotter function * D03 CAD function ... Function for generating the following coordinate figure (prior art) A. Drawing function: A function of inputting coordinate data of a design by a coordinate input device and generating output coordinate graphic data B. Editing function: a function of correcting (inputting) the input or generated input coordinate graphic data to generate coordinate graphic data (present invention) C. Image overlap coordinate figure generation function: Function to generate coordinate figure data from image data D. Blinking unitization function: A function to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data by converting the coordinate figure data into blinking units * D04 Paint function: Image creation function to create an image and image editing function to modify the image * D05 Paint software: Paint function: Image Generic name of a program having an input function, a file function, and a hard copy function * D06 Trace ... In the prior art, a work of manually drawing a contour on a pattern to determine coordinate values (in the present invention, a contour is drawn on an image. Work to determine the coordinate values by drawing) * D08 segment ... points, line segments, polygonal lines, circles, and other coordinate figure elements * D09 segment number ... blinking unit number

* D10 Scene: One state that changes in time series * D11 Unit: Basic unit of blinking (figure blinking unit) (One unit is formed by one or more segments) * D12 Unit number: Unit Serial number to be added * D13 Unit note ... Note added to unit * D14 Group ... Blinking group unit (one or more units form one group) * D15 Group number ... Serial number to be added to group * D16 Group note: Annotation added to the group * D17 Cell: One scene of one unit (minimum blinking unit) * D18 Conventional CAD attributes: Includes color, pattern, line type, line width and segment Coordinate figure element * D19 Conventional CAD software ... A program for drawing and editing coordinate figures having conventional CAD attributes. Program

* D20 (Advertising medium) display control: control for simulating image output device or control for blinking display device or both of them * D21 Blinking mode ... 1 drawing
In the present invention, in the form of displaying a plurality of graphic drawings for each time point or displaying in a time chart in which the temporal change of blinking is displayed, in the present invention, a blinking time series automatically generated by a program from blinking unitized data. Data display format

E. Terms of software of the present invention * E01 CAD attributes of the present invention ... Conventional CAD attributes (unit coordinate graphic element for unitizing a coordinate graphic including color, pattern, line type, line width and segment), unit number, unit Blinking unit coordinate figure element consisting of a note, a group number and a blinking unitizing element for changing a coordinate figure including a group note * E02 Software of the present invention ... Generic name of the following program shown in FIG. Series figure display program: A program that inputs blinking unit coordinate figure data and executes simulation display (a program that is translated into an object program by the compiler and linked with other programs by the link editor)

* NCAD (CAD program of the present invention)
... The CAD of the present invention using physical pattern information, input coordinate graphic data, input image data, pattern coordinate data, etc. as inputs.
Blinking unit coordinates consisting of attributes (coordinate / graphic element including color, pattern, line type, line width and segment, and blinking unitizing element for changing coordinate figure including unit number, unit note, group number and group note) Graphic element)
"Blinking unitized CAD program" (FIG. 9) having a function of generating, editing, recording, and printing blinking unit coordinate graphic data and output image data, and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data

* NRGS: For inputting blinking unitized data specifying a blinking unit of a figure, outputting blinking time series data, and further transmitting the blinking time series data by dividing it into time series (scenes). "Blinking time series conversion program" that outputs blinking time series transmission data (Fig. 10)

* NGEN: blinking unit coordinate figure data is input to generate a time-series figure display program for executing a simulation display "time-series figure display program generation program" (FIG. 11) * NDSP ... "Simulation display control program" that executes simulation display by inputting data and time-series graphic display program (Fig. 1
2)

* NSEQ ... Inputs blinking time-series data and outputs graphic blinking sequence data to be recorded in a pattern blinking display device control data for controlling the graphic blinking display device or a sequence program storage medium for controlling the graphic blinking display device. "Figure flashing display device control program" (Fig. 1
3) * NSEP ... Input the blinking time-series data and blinking unit coordinate figure data to control the panel blinking display device. Control panel blinking display device control data or the sequence blinking to control the panel blinking display device. "Panel blink display device control program" that outputs sequence data (Fig. 14)

F. General terms In the following description, the meanings of terms that are not used in the description are as follows. * F01 selection ... Designating one from a plurality of predetermined conditions. * F02 setting ... Specifying one condition from a predetermined range. * F03 Work: A concrete operation of a subordinate concept. * F04 Procedure: A sequence of multiple operations. * F05 Step ... From among the procedures that include multiple tasks,
It refers to one or more specified operations. * F06 Means ... A combination of multiple operations. * F07 Function: A concrete means of a specific subordinate concept realized by combining a plurality of procedures. * F08 processing: Means of a specific superordinate concept realized by combining a plurality of functions. * F09 Input: Supplying a specified condition to a device from a predetermined range or a plurality of predetermined conditions. * F10 Operation: Refers to making equipment work.

1. The conventional display control method of the advertising medium is summarized as follows. (1) Method of generating coordinate graphic or image for advertisement In the conventional method of generating coordinate graphic or image for advertisement, is it possible to manually create a design in which contours and coloring are applied to the paper by using a drawing tool, paint, etc.? An image is generated using paint software, or a coordinate figure is generated using conventional CAD software. (2) Method of editing coordinate graphic or image for advertisement The conventional method of editing coordinate graphic or image for advertisement is to manually correct the design of the contoured and colored paper using drawing tools, paints, etc. An image is edited using paint software, or coordinate graphics are edited using conventional CAD software.

(3) Recording Method of Advertising Coordinate Graphic or Image The conventional recording method of the advertising coordinate graphic or image is to save the created (newly created) design or the edited (corrected) design, or the image. The data is stored in the image storage device or the coordinate graphic data is stored in the coordinate graphic storage device. (4) Method of printing coordinate graphic or image for advertisement The conventional method of printing coordinate graphic or image for advertisement is to use the hard copy function of paint software to hard copy the image data or to use the plotter function of conventional CAD software. It is used to output coordinate graphic data or is printed on the printer using the print function.

(5) Method of generating blinking pattern In the conventional method of generating a blinking pattern, in order to express a temporal change of the blinking pattern, a plurality of graphic drawings for each time point are prepared or the blinking time is changed. I am handwriting a time chart that illustrates the changes.

(6) Blinking style editing method In the conventional blinking style editing method, the required number of graphic drawings created by the above-described flashing creation method is corrected, or the time created by the above-described advertising flashing creation method is used. The chart is manually modified. (7) Blinking style recording method In the conventional blinking style recording method, a time chart or a graphic drawing created by the above-described blinking generation method is recorded. (8) Method of printing blinking style Conventionally, there is no method of printing the blinking style, and the time chart or the graphic drawing created by the above method of generating the blinking style is used instead. (9) Method of executing blinking method In the past, there was no method of executing the blinking method.

A conventional example will be described below with reference to the graphic drawings and coordinate graphics of FIGS. 2 to 4
Are also used in the description of the embodiments of the present invention. Figure 2
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a graphic drawing [ABCDE] for explaining the display control method of the prior art and the present invention. Each figure shows the blinking state in scenes 1 (t1) to 12 (t12), and shows that the filled characters are lit in each scene.

FIG. 3A shows image data generated in the main memory from the conventional pattern or physical pattern information or input image data, displayed on the display, edited and stored in the image memory and hard copy. FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of image generation to be copied to the device. FIG. 1B shows coordinate graphic data generated in a main storage device from a conventional design or input coordinate graphic data, displayed on a display, and edited to store coordinate graphic data. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of coordinate figure generation for storage in a device and printing in a printing device.

In FIG. 3A, the method of generating, editing, recording and outputting image data using the conventional paint software is as follows. (1) Design B0 using the drawing function of the paint software
2, the coordinate value of the design is input to draw the image B09, and the image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. (2) Using the image input function of the paint software, the physical pattern information B03 is read and the image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. (3) Using the input image data interface, the input image data B10a is input to generate the image data B10 in the main storage device. (4) Display C of the image data B10 in the main storage device
20 and edit as needed using the edit function. (5) The edited image data B10 is stored in the auxiliary storage device (image storage device C05) or is copied and saved by the hard copy device C19.

In FIG. 3B, the method of generating, editing, recording and outputting coordinate graphic data using the conventional CAD software is as follows. (1) Design B02 using the drawing function of CAD software
The coordinate figure B05 is drawn by inputting the coordinate value of the design, and the coordinate figure data B06 is generated in the main memory. (2) Using the input coordinate graphic data interface, input the input coordinate graphic data B06a and generate the coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory. (3) The coordinate graphic data B06 of the main storage device is displayed on the display C20 and is edited using the editing function as needed. (4) The edited coordinate graphic data B06 is stored in the auxiliary storage device (coordinate graphic storage device C02) or printed by the printing device C17 and saved.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of coordinate graphic data for explaining the display control method of the prior art and the present invention. This figure shows the X-coordinate value and the Y-coordinate value of the inflection point of each character in the figure drawing [ABCDE] of FIG. (The lower part of the inside of the) and the conventional CA described above.
D attribute.

(1) Method for Generating, Editing, Recording, and Printing Advertisement Coordinate Graphic or Image Generation, editing, or advertising advertisement coordinate graphic or image according to the prior art
The recording and printing methods are the same except for the manual generation method.
It is as follows.

FIG. 5 shows a conventional paint software D05.
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a conventional external connection function of paint software in which image data is generated and edited by using the, and the output image data B10b is stored in the image storage device C05 or is copied by the hard copy device C19. The paint software D05 shown in the figure stores the physical pattern information B03 in the image input device C0.
4, an image input function for inputting the input coordinate figure data from the coordinate input device, a drawing paint function for creating an image by inputting coordinate coordinate data, an edit paint function for editing the input image data or the drawn image data, and an image for the output image data B10b. It has a file function of storing in the storage device C05 and a hard copy function of copying the output image data B10b by the hard copy device C19.

Referring to FIG. 6, the conventional CAD software D19 is used to input and edit the input coordinate graphic data B06a, and the edited output coordinate graphic data B06b is stored in the coordinate graphic storage device C02. It is a CAD software external connection functional diagram of the prior art which stores the hard copy output by the printing device C17. CAD in the figure
The software D19 has a CAD function of inputting and editing the input coordinate graphic data B06a by the coordinate input device C01,
The output coordinate graphic data B06b is stored in the coordinate graphic storage device C02.
A file function of storing in the printer, a plotter function of outputting a hard copy by the plotter device C18, and a printing device C.
17 has a print function of printing the output coordinate graphic data B06b.

Therefore, in the prior art using the paint software D05, there is a method of storing the output image data B10b drawn and edited by the paint software D05 in the image storage device C05 and outputting it to the hard copy device C19. There was no technique for outputting the output image data as coordinate graphic data. Also, conventional CAD
In the conventional technique using the soft D19, the conventional C
Although there is a technique for printing the output coordinate graphic data B06b created by using the AD software D19 and the conventional coordinate graphic data B06 having the CAD attribute, the flashing unitizing element for specifying the flashing unit of the graphic described later is used. There was no technical idea of processing the coordinate graphic data having the CAD attribute of the present invention for generating and editing the blinking mode.

(2) Method of creating and editing blinking pattern In the method of creating and editing blinking pattern of the prior art, a graphic drawing is required for each time point in order to graphically represent the temporal change of blinking. To confirm the continuous changes over a long period of time, a huge amount of graphic drawings was required.

(3) Method of recording blinking pattern In the prior art, there was no means for electronically recording or printing the temporal change of blinking by a computer.

(4) Method of executing blinking pattern In the prior art, since there was no means for processing the blinking time change by the computer to execute the blinking pattern, the blinking pattern was manually filled in.

[0050]

In a display control method for a conventional advertising medium using a computer, a method of generating, editing, recording and printing an advertising coordinate figure or image and a method of generating, editing, recording and blinking patterns. The common problems of printing methods are as follows. (1) Method of generating, editing, recording and printing an image using paint software The conventional technique is to create an original picture (design to be edited),
You can create, edit, record and print images,
The coordinate figure could not be recognized. Therefore,
Since there is no coordinate graphic data having the CAD attribute of the present invention for generating and editing the flashing pattern using the flashing unitizing element that specifies the flashing unit of the graphic, the organic combination of the image data and the coordinate graphic data is performed. I couldn't.

(2) Method of generating, editing, recording and printing coordinate figure using conventional CAD software The conventional technique is to output the coordinate figure created using the conventional CAD software and the CAD attribute of the conventional technique. Although it is possible to generate the coordinate graphic data having, but because there is no coordinate graphic data having the CAD attribute of the present invention for generating and editing the blinking pattern using the blinking unitizing element that specifies the blinking unit of the graphic, The coordinate figure data and the image data were not organically combined.

(3) Method of creating and editing blinking pattern The conventional method of creating and editing blinking pattern requires a graphic drawing for each time point in order to diagram the temporal change of blinking. However, in order to confirm a continuous change over a long period of time, a huge figure drawing is required, and it is very difficult to deal with the change immediately. In order to check the state of the blinking pattern, it is necessary to make a drawing at each point in time, so a huge amount of drawing is needed to check a continuous change over a long period of time. It was very difficult to do.

(4) Blinking mode recording and printing method In the blinking mode recording and printing method of the prior art, the means for electronically recording and printing the blinking temporal change by a computer. Therefore, it took a lot of time and effort to record the blinking pattern because it was manually completed.

(5) Method of executing blinking pattern In the method of executing blinking pattern of the prior art, since there is no means for processing the change of blinking with a computer and executing the change, the paper filled in by hand is visually inspected. However, it takes a lot of time and effort, and it is not easy to recognize the state of change.

As a result of the above, the problem to be solved by the present invention is that the image data and the coordinate graphic data are used when designing the blinking mode of the advertisement display using a computer in the neon sign industry, an advertising agency, etc. Can be efficiently generated, edited, recorded, printed, etc., and the blinking pattern that changes in time series can be easily viewed in a short time by means of generation, editing, recording, printing, execution, etc. It is another object of the present invention to provide a display control method of an advertising medium that can perform simulation display or blink display.

[0100]

The method of controlling the display of the advertising medium according to the present invention includes, among the processing steps of the overall configurations [1] to [6] used for implementing the present invention shown in FIG. , A configuration in which processing steps are combined as needed and a configuration for adding a function for embodying the display control method of the advertising medium of the present invention, wherein coordinate graphic data for advertisement and image data are generated, edited, and recorded And printing, and further generating, editing, recording, printing and executing blinking time series data. Hereinafter, each method for solving the problem will be described.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the embodiment 1 of FIG. 16, the claim 1 is from the processing steps of [2] and [5] in the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. "Blinking time series program NRGS" processing step of inputting blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the graphic and outputting blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series, and Series data B1
1 is input to control the graphic blinking display device C27. The graphic blinking display device control data B15 or the graphic blinking display device C.
27 is a display control method for an advertising medium, which includes a "graphic blinking display device control program NSEQ" processing step for outputting the graphic blinking sequence data B13 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling 27.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the second embodiment of FIG. 17, the second aspect of the present invention is the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7 from the processing steps [2] and [6]. "Blinking time series program NRGS" processing step of inputting blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the graphic and outputting blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series, and Series data B1
1 and the unit coordinate figure data B26 obtained by uniting the coordinate figure with the blinking unitized data B07 and the blinking unitized data B
Blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having the following information is input to control the panel blinking display device C28: the panel blinking display device control data B16 or the panel blinking display device C28.
And a panel blinking sequence data B14 to be recorded in a sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the display medium, and a "panel blinking display device control program NSEP" processing step.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the third embodiment of FIG. 18, the third aspect of the present invention is the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. The coordinate figures of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. “Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD” processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinated figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 and blinking unitized data B07, and blinking unitized data B07 are input to display blinking. A blinking time series program NRGS processing step for outputting blinking time series data B11 that changes the
By inputting the blinking time-series data B11, the graphic blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 or the graphic blinking sequence data B13 to be recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 is output. A method for controlling display of an advertising medium, which comprises a "graphic blinking display device control program NSEQ" processing step.

As shown in the embodiment correspondence diagram of the fourth embodiment of FIG. 19, the fourth aspect is [1], [2] and [6] of the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. The coordinate figures of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. “Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD” processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinated figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 and blinking unitized data B07, and blinking unitized data B07 are input to display blinking. A blinking time series program NRGS processing step for outputting blinking time series data B11 that changes the
Blinking time series data B11 and blinking unit coordinate figure data B
08 to input the panel blinking display device control data B16 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28 or the panel blinking sequence data B14 to be recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. Equipment control program NSE
P ”processing step.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the fifth embodiment of FIG. 20, the fifth aspect of the invention is the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. “Blinking time series program NRGS” processing step of inputting blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the graphic and outputting blinking time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series, and coordinates. The blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having the unit coordinate figure data B26 obtained by uniting the figure with the blinking unitized data B07 and the blinking unitized data B07 is input to generate a time-series figure display program E05 for displaying a simulation figure. "Time series graphic display program generation program NGEN" processing step, blinking time series transmission data B12 and time As input string figure display program E05, a display control method for advertising media for performing a simulation display comprising a "simulation display control program NDSP" process step.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the sixth embodiment of FIG. 21, the sixth aspect is from the processing steps [1] to [4] in the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7. A unit coordinate figure that is configured and unitizes the coordinate figure of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. "Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD" processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having data B26 and blinking unitized data B07, and inputting the blinking unitized data B07, the simulation display is time-series. "Blinking time series program NRGS" processing step for outputting blinking time series transmission data B12 to be changed, and blinking unit code "Time-series figure display program generation program NGEN" processing step for inputting the figure data B08 to generate a time-series figure display program E05 for displaying a simulation figure, and blinking time-series transmission data B12 and time-series figure display program This is a display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises a "simulation display control program NDSP" processing step for executing a simulation display with E05 as an input.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the seventh embodiment of FIG. 22, the seventh aspect is from the processing steps [2] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7. Blinking time-series data that is configured to input blinking unitized data B07 that identifies a blinking unit of a figure, output blinking time-series data B11 that changes the blinking display in time series, and further change the simulation display in time series. Data B1
"Blinking time series program NRGS" processing step for outputting 2 and blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 obtained by uniting the coordinate figure with blinking unitized data B07 and blinking unitized data B07 are inputted. And a "time-series graphic display program generation program NGEN" processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic,
"Simulation display control program NDSP" for executing simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05
Input the processing step and blinking time series data B11,
"Graphic blinking display device control program NSEQ" processing for outputting the graphic blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 or the pattern blinking sequence data B13 to be recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 And a display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises steps.

As shown in the embodiment correspondence diagram of the eighth embodiment of FIG. 23, claim 8 is [2] to [4] and [6] in the process step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7. The blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the figure is input, the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series is output, and the simulation display is changed in time series. Blinking time series transmission data B12 is output.
GS ”processing step and blinking coordinate figure Unitized data B
The flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 having the unit coordinate graphic data B26 unitized by 07 and the flashing unitized data B07 is input, and the time series graphic display program E05 for displaying the simulation graphic is generated. "Program generation program NGEN" processing step, "simulation display control program NDSP" processing step for executing simulation display by inputting blinking time series transmission data B12 and time series graphic display program E05, blinking time series data B11 and blinking The panel blinking sequence data is input by inputting the unit coordinate figure data B08 and is recorded in the panel blinking display device control data B16 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28 or the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. B14 outputs the a display control method of advertising medium consisting of a "panel flashing device control program NSEP" process step.

As shown in the embodiment correspondence diagram of the ninth embodiment of FIG. 24, the ninth aspect of the invention is that from the processing steps of [1] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. A unit coordinate figure that is configured and unitizes the coordinate figure of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. "Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD" processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having data B26 and blinking unitized data B07, and blinking unitized data B07 are inputted to make blinking display in time series. The flashing time series data B11 for changing is output, and the flashing time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series is output. To "blink time series of program NR
"GS" processing step and blinking unit coordinate figure data B08
To input a time series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic, a "time series graphic display program generation program NGEN" processing step, and blinking time series transmission data B12 and a time series graphic display program E05 are input. "Simulation display control program NDS that executes simulation display as
P ”processing step and blinking time-series data B11 are input, and the figure blinking display apparatus control data B15 for controlling the figure blinking display apparatus C27 or the figure blinking recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the figure blinking display apparatus C27. This is a display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises a "graphic blinking display device control program NSEQ" processing step for outputting sequence data B13.

As shown in the embodiment corresponding diagram of the tenth embodiment of FIG. 25, claim 10 is [1] to [4] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7. And the coordinate data of the design B02,
Physical pattern information B03, input coordinate graphic data B06a,
Unit coordinate figure data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 obtained by uniting a coordinate figure such as the input image data B10a with blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure.
"Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD" processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having the following, and blinking unitized data B07 are inputted to generate blinking time series data B11 for changing blinking display in time series. The "flashing time series program NRGS" processing step of outputting and further outputting the flashing time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series, and the flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 are input to display the simulation graphic. A program for generating a time-series figure display program NGE for generating a time-series figure display program E05
"N" processing step, blinking time-series transmission data B12 and time-series figure display program E05 are input, and "simulation display control program NDSP" processing step, blinking time-series data B11 and blinking unit coordinate figure data Panel flashing display device control data B16 or panel flashing display device C28 for controlling panel flashing display device C28 by inputting B08
And a panel blinking sequence data B14 to be recorded in a sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the display medium, and a "panel blinking display device control program NSEP" processing step.

The eleventh aspect of the present invention is any one of the fifth to tenth aspects, as shown in the eleventh aspect of FIG.
Blinking time series transmission data B12 is transmitted during the processing of the blinking time series conversion program NRGS processing step that outputs the blinking time series transmission data B12 that changes the simulation display in time series using one computer. After the step of storing in the data storage device C14 (auxiliary storage device) and the step of processing the flashing time series program NRGS, the flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 is input to display the simulation graphic time series graphic display. The step of generating the time series graphic display program generation program NGEN processing step for generating the program E05 to start the time series graphic display program E05 from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08, and the blinking time series transmission data B12 and the time series graphic Simulation by display program E05 ® is a display control method of advertising media and a step of executing the down display.

According to a twelfth aspect, in the fifth or seventh or eighth embodiment, as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 27, when two computers are used and the second computer CPU2 displays a graphic figure of the simulation. The time-series graphic display program generation program N05 for generating the series graphic display program E05 is started, and the time-series graphic display program E is started from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08.
Generating step 05 and the first computer CPU
1 to the step of transmitting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 to the second computer CPU2 through the first communication means C21, and the second computer CPU2 causes the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E0.
5, the method of controlling the display of an advertising medium, the method including the step of executing a simulation display.

The thirteenth aspect of the present invention is the sixth, ninth or tenth embodiment.
In FIG. 28, as shown in the thirteenth embodiment of FIG. 28, by using two computers, the first computer CPU1
From the second communication means C22 to the second computer CPU2 to the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08, and the second computer CPU2 displays the simulation graphic time series graphic display program E.
05 for starting the time series graphic display program generation program NGEN processing step to generate the time series graphic display program E05 from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08, and the first computer CPU1 to the first communication means. Second computer CP through C21
U2 of transmitting the blinking time-series transmission data B12, and the second computer CPU2 executes the simulation display by the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05 This is a display control method.

A fourteenth aspect (embodiment 61 described later) is
In the third or fourth or sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 specifies the blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the graphic including the unit number or the unit number and the group number (CAD attribute of the present invention). (FIG. 79) and unit coordinate figure data B26 (FIG. 80) in which a coordinate figure including a color, a pattern, a line type, a line width and a segment is unitized by blinking unitized data B07. This is a display control method.

[0190]

【Example】

[Explanation of FIG. 7] FIG. 7 is a process step diagram of the entire configuration (embodiment 6 described later) used for implementing the display control method of the advertising medium of the present invention. It is composed of the processing step [6].

[1] The coordinate data of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate graphic data B06a, the coordinate graphic B05 such as the input image data B10a, and the blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the graphic (of the present invention). With the CAD attribute E01) as an input,
Blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 unitized by blinking unitized data B07 and blinking unitized data B07 and output image data B10
“Blinking unitized CAD program NCAD (CAD program of the present invention)” (FIG. 9) processing step (hereinafter referred to as NCAD processing step) having a function of generating, editing, recording and outputting b, and [2] blinking unit Input the digitized data B07 and output the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series,
Further, the "flashing time series program NRGS" (FIG. 10) processing step (hereinafter, NR) for outputting the flashing time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series
GS processing step),

[3] "Time-series figure display program generation program NGEN" (FIG. 11) processing step (FIG. 11) for inputting blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 to generate a time-series figure display program E05 for displaying a simulation figure (Hereinafter referred to as NGEN processing step) and [4] Blinking time-series transmission data B12 and time-series graphic display program E05 are input to execute a simulation display "Simulation display control program ND
SP "(FIG. 12) processing step (hereinafter referred to as NDSP processing step),

[5] Blinking time-series data B11 is input and the pattern blinking is stored in the pattern blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27 or the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27. By inputting the “graphic blinking display device control program NSEQ” (FIG. 13) processing step (hereinafter referred to as NSEQ processing step) that outputs the sequence data B13, and [6] blinking time series data B11 and blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08. , Panel blinking display device control data B16 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28 or panel blinking sequence data B recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28
14 is output "panel blinking display device control program N
The SEP "(FIG. 14) processing step (hereinafter referred to as NSEP processing step) is a display control method of the advertising medium of the combination shown in the later-described software embodiment corresponding diagram of the present invention of FIG.

[Explanation of FIG. 8] FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a data storage area of the main memory in each processing step.
It is as follows. (A) Data storage area of main storage device in NCAD processing step Display screen area, CAD screen storage area, paint screen storage area, coordinate graphic area, other data area (B) Data storage area of main storage device in NRGS processing step Display screen area, blinking time-series data area, other data area (C) Data storage area of main memory of NDSP processing step Display screen area, other data area (D) Data storage area of main memory of NSEQ processing step Display screen area, blinking time series data area, sequence data area, other data areas

In each of the external connection function diagrams described below, each file function has a function of reading data from the auxiliary storage device and writing it to the main storage device, and a function of writing data of the main storage device to the auxiliary storage device. There is.

[Description of Configuration of FIG. 9] FIG. 9 shows a design B02.
Coordinate data, physical pattern information B03, input coordinate graphic data B06a, input image data B10a, etc.
05 and blinking unitized data B that identifies the blinking unit of the figure
07 (CAD attribute E01 of the present invention) as input, blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 obtained by uniting the input coordinate figure B05 with blinking unitized data B07 and FIG. 9 is an NCAD external connection function diagram having a function of generating, editing, recording, and outputting output image data B10b.

The configuration shown in FIG. 9 will be described below. [1] The image input function NC1 is a function of reading the physical pattern information B03 by the image input device C04 and generating image data B10 in the main storage device. [2] The input image data interface NC2 has a function of reading the input image data B10a and generating the image data B10 in the main storage device. [3] The paint function NC3 receives the coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 and generates the image data B10 in the main storage device, and the paint function NC3 is generated by any one of the above [1] to [3]. And an image editing function of correcting the image data B10.

[4] The input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 has a function of reading the input coordinate graphic data B06a and generating the coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory. [5] CAD function NC5: A plotting function of inputting coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 and generating coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device; Coordinate graphic data B06 input by the above [4]
Editing function for editing An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above [1] to [3], and D. Unit coordinate figure data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 obtained by blinking the coordinated figure data B06 generated by [4] or [5] with blinking unitized data B07.
And a blinking unitization function for generating blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having the following.

[6] The screen operation function NC6 erases, scrolls, or redisplays the screen image displayed on the display when generating or editing the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 from the image data B10 or the coordinate graphic data B06. It is an operation function such as. [7] The file function NC7 sets a file name, stores the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 of the set first file name, and sets the second file name of the set second file name. Image storage device C0
5 for storing the output image data B10b. [8] Communication function NC8 is blinking unit coordinate figure data B0
8 is transmitted to the time-series graphic display program generation program NGEN operation step described later. [9] The drawing output function NC9 is a function for causing the drawing device C18 to draw the output coordinate graphic B05b from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08. [10] Printing function NC10 is for blinking unit coordinate figure data B
08 is a function of causing the printer C17 to print. [11] Hard copy function NC11 is a function for copying the image data displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C19.

[Explanation of Configuration of FIG. 10] FIG. 10 shows input of blinking unitized data B07, generation, editing, recording and output of blinking time series data B11 for changing blinking display in time series, and further simulation. It is a NRGS external connection functional diagram which outputs blinking time series transmission data B12 which changes a display in time series.

The structure shown in FIG. 10 will be described below. [1] System function NR1 is blinking time series data B11
Is a function of controlling the initialization of, the execution of the OS command, the end of the NRGS step, and the like. [2] Setting function NR2 is a function for editing the blinking time series data that changes the blinking display in time series, and a function for setting conditions when executing other functions. [3] Screen operation function NR3 is the blinking unitized data B07
When editing the blinking time-series data B11, erase the image displayed on the screen, scroll,
It is a screen operation function such as screen redisplay.

[4] Blinking unitized data file function NR
4 is a file name setting function and blinking unitized data B07 for identifying the blinking unit of the figure in the file having the set file name or blinking unitized data B07 of the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 input from the NCAD processing step.
Is a function to store. [5] Blinking time-series data editing function NR5 is a function to time-blink the blinking unitized data B07 into blinking time-series data B11. [6] The blinking time-series transmission data editing function NR6 converts the blinking time-series data B11 into blinking time-series transmission data B12 having simulation display execution conditions such as transmission start, transmission end, and suspension of the blinking time-series transmission data B12. It is a function to edit. [7] Blinking time series data file function NR7 is a function for storing the blinking time series data B11 in the blinking time series data storage device C09 having the set file name. [8] Blinking time-series transmission data file function NR8 is a blinking time-series transmission data storage device C1 having a set file name.
4, blinking time-series transmission data B12 for dividing the blinking time-series data B11 into time-series (scenes) for transmission.
Is a function to store.

[9] The communication function NR9 is a function of transmitting the blinking time series transmission data B12 to the simulation display control program NDSP processing step described later. [10] The printing function NR10 is a function for printing the blinking time series data B11 on the printing device C17. [11] The hard copy function NR11 converts the edit screen image data B10d displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C.
It is a function to copy to 19.

[Description of Configuration of FIG. 11] FIG. 11 is an NGEN external connection function diagram for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 and generating a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a graphic of a simulation.

The structure shown in FIG. 11 will be described below. [1] The time-series graphic display subprogram generation function NG1
This is a function of generating a source program of a time-series graphic display sub-program for displaying a simulation graphic from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 written in the main storage device directly or through the second communication means C22 described later. . [2] Translation / linkage editing function (time-series graphic display program generation function) NG2 is formed of the following functions. A. A translation function that calls an existing translation program (compiler) and translates the generated source program of the time-series graphic display subprogram (in C language) to generate the object program of the time-series graphic display subprogram. B. Ready-made linkage editing program (linkage editor)
A linked editing function for calling up the main program for control functions such as off-the-shelf hardware and the object program of the above-mentioned time-series graphic display sub-program to generate a time-series graphic display program E05.

[3] The file function NG3 is a function of reading the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 and writing it in the main storage device. [4] Communication function NG4 is the NCA of the first computer
Flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 of the main memory of the first computer, which is transmitted by the communication function NC8 of D processing step
Is received and written in the main memory of the second computer. The communication function NG4 and the communication function NC8 of the NCAD processing step form the second communication means C22.

[Description of Configuration of FIG. 12] FIG. 12 shows the blinking time series transmission data B12 and the time series graphic display program E.
Inputs 05 and executes simulation display N
It is a DSP external connection functional diagram.

The configuration shown in FIG. 12 will be described below. [1] The simulation display execution function ND1 blinks for each scene of the blinking time-series transmission data B12 written in the main storage device by the batch processing (batch processing) of [3] below or the real-time processing of [4] below. The screen display RGB dot data B17 consisting of the presence / absence and blinking color data and the display graphic of each unit displayed for each scene of the time-series graphic display program E05 read from the main storage device is displayed on the simulation display execution device C26. (For example, the display C20) is sequentially output and a simulation display is performed. [2] The time series graphic display program starting function ND2 is
The time series graphic display program E05 output from the GEN operation step and stored in the auxiliary storage device (time series graphic display program storage device C15) is written in the main storage device. [3] Blinking time series transmission data file function ND3
The blinking time series transmission data B12 output from the RGS operation step is read from the auxiliary storage device and written in the main storage device.

[4] Communication function ND4 writes the blinking time-series transmission data B12 output from the main memory of the first computer to the first communication means C21 in the main memory of the second computer in real time. This communication function N
Communication function NR9 of D4 and the NRGS processing step described above
And form the first communication means C21.

When there is only one computer, during the operation of the NRGS processing step, the blinking time-series transmission data B12 is stored, and after the NRGS processing step is stopped, the time-series figure of the simulation is displayed. The display program E05 is activated to execute the simulation display. Therefore, when there is only one computer,
The communication function ND4 is not used.

[5] Hard copy function ND5 is a function for copying the edit screen image data B10d displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C19. [6] The video interface ND6 has a function of storing the video data for video B10c in the video storage device C11f.

[Explanation of Configuration of FIG. 13] In FIG. 13, the blinking time-series data B11 is inputted and the graphic blinking display device C27 is inputted.
Pattern blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27.
3 is a functional diagram of NSEQ external connection for outputting 3. FIG.

The configuration shown in FIG. 13 will be described below. [1] System function NS1 is a function for controlling initialization of sequence data, execution of OS commands, end of NSEQ step, and the like. [2] Setting function NS2 is a function for setting conditions for executing the blinking sequence data editing function and other functions. [3] Blinking time series data file function NS3 is NRG
Blinking time series data B11 input from the S processing step
Is written in the main storage device.

[4] The figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5 stores (1) a function for re-editing the blinking time series data B11 and (2) a plurality of chips forming the sequence program storage medium C24 as an aggregate. In order to do so, it is a function of generating the graphic blinking sequence data B13 divided into a plurality of data. [5] Screen operation function NS6 is the blinking time series data B11.
This is an operation function of deleting the image display of the screen displayed on the display when editing the figure blinking sequence data B13, scrolling, redisplaying the screen, and the like.

[6] The blinking display execution control function NS7 causes the blinking time series data B11 to perform blinking such as the repeated blinking portion, the number of repetitions, and the pause of the figure blinking display device C27 (in the actual blinking display unit). This is a function of editing the graphic blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units. This edited figure blinking display device control data B1
5 is output to the graphic blinking display control device C29 to control the graphic blinking display device C27. [7] Figure blink sequence data file function NS8
Writes the graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device to the auxiliary storage device (graphic blinking sequence data storage device C11a) and stores it, or reads the data stored in the auxiliary storage device to Write to the device.

The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in this auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device,
It is output to the sequence program generation device C23 and recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24. After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24, and the medium data display control device C3 is read.
1 to control the graphic blinking display device C27. [8] Printing function NS9 is the pattern blink sequence data B
13 or a graphic blinking display device control data B15 is a function to print on the printer C17. [9] The hard copy function NS10 uses the hard copy device C to copy the edit screen image data B10d displayed on the screen.
It is a function to copy to 19.

[Explanation of Configuration of FIG. 14] FIG. 14 shows panel blinking display device control data B16 or panel blinking for inputting blinking time series data B11 and blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 to control the panel blinking display device C28. Sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the display device C28
FIG. 7 is a functional diagram of NSEP external connection for outputting panel blink sequence data B14 recorded in FIG.

The configuration shown in FIG. 14 will be described below. [1] System function NP1 is a function for controlling initialization of sequence data, execution of OS commands, end of NSEP step, and the like. [2] The setting function NP2 is a function for setting conditions for executing the blinking sequence data editing function and other functions. [3] Blinking time series data file function NP3 is NRG
Blinking time series data B11 input from the S processing step
Is written in the main storage device. [4] Blinking unit coordinate figure data file function NP4
This is a function of writing the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 input from the NCAD processing step into the main memory. [5] Panel blink sequence data editing function NP5
(1) A function of re-editing the blinking time series data B11, and (2) a sequence program storage medium C as an aggregate.
Panel flashing sequence data B14 divided into a plurality of data for storage in a plurality of chips forming 24.
Is a function to generate.

[6] The screen operation function NP6 is an operation function of deleting the image display of the screen displayed on the display when editing the panel flashing sequence data B14 from the flashing time series data B11, scrolling, redisplaying the screen, and the like. . [7] The blinking display execution control function NP7 causes the blinking time series data B11 to perform blinking such as repeated blinking portions of the panel blinking display device C28 (of the actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions, and pauses. This is a function of editing the panel blinking display device control data B16 divided into.
The edited panel blinking display device control data B16 is output to the panel blinking display control device C30 to control the panel blinking display device C28. [8] Panel blink sequence data file function NP8
Is. The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device is read and written and stored in the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b). Further, the data stored in the auxiliary storage device is read and written in the main storage device.

The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device, output to the sequence program generating device C23, and recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24.
After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24 and output to the medium data display control device C31 to control the panel blinking display device C28. [9] The printing function NP9 is a function for printing the panel blinking sequence data B14 or the panel blinking display device control data B16 on the printer C17. [10] The hard copy function NP10 uses the hard copy device C to copy the edit screen image data B10d displayed on the screen.
It is a function to copy to 19.

[Explanation of Configuration of FIG. 15] FIG. 15 is a processing step diagram [1] of the overall configuration used to implement the display control method of the advertising medium of the present invention shown in FIG. It is an embodiment corresponding figure which combined the process step as needed from thru | or [6]. Less than,
The embodiment shown in FIG. 15 will be described.

[Explanation of Embodiment 1] FIG. 16 corresponds to the embodiment of Embodiment 1 which is composed of the processing steps [2] and [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure, and the structure of Embodiment 1 is as follows.

Blinking unitized data B07 (CAD attribute of the present invention) for specifying the blinking unit of the figure is input to generate blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series.
NRGS processing steps for editing, recording and outputting (Fig. 1
Part of 0),

By inputting the blinking time series data B11, the pattern blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27 or the pattern blinking sequence data B13 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27. And an NSEQ (FIG. 13) processing step for outputting.

[Explanation of Embodiment 2] FIG. 17 corresponds to the embodiment of Embodiment 2 which is composed of the processing steps [2] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure and the structure of Embodiment 2 is as follows.

The NRGS processing step (FIG. 10) of inputting the blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the figure and generating, editing, recording and outputting the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series. Part of the

The blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having the blinking time series data B11 and the unit coordinate figure data B26 obtained by uniting the coordinate figure by the blinking unitized data B07 and the blinking unitized data B07 are input to the panel blinking display device. Panel blinking display device control data B for controlling C28
16 or the NSEP (FIG. 14) processing step of outputting the panel blinking sequence data B14 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28.

[Explanation of Third Embodiment] FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the processing steps [1] of the entire configuration shown in FIG.
It is a figure corresponding to the implementation of the aspect 3 comprised from the processing steps of [2] and [5], and the structure of the aspect 3 is as follows.

A unit coordinate figure in which the coordinate figure of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 which specifies the blinking unit of the figure. Data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 (CA of the present invention
NCAD (FIG. 9) processing step of generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 and output image data B10b having a D attribute).

Part of the NRGS processing step (FIG. 10) of inputting the blinking unitized data B07 and generating, editing, recording and outputting the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series.

By inputting the blinking time series data B11, the graphic blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 or the graphic blinking sequence data B13 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27. And an NSEQ (FIG. 13) processing step for outputting.

[Explanation of Fourth Embodiment] FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the processing steps [1] in the processing steps of the overall configuration shown in FIG.
It is a figure corresponding to the aspect of the embodiment 4 comprised from the processing steps of [2] and [6], and the structure of the embodiment 4 is as follows.

A unit coordinate figure in which the coordinate data of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. Data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 (CA of the present invention
NCAD (FIG. 9) processing step of generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 and output image data B10b having a D attribute).

Part of the NRGS processing step (FIG. 10) of inputting the blinking unitized data B07 and generating, editing, recording and outputting the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series.

By inputting the blinking time series data B11 and the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, the panel blinking display device C2
8 for displaying the panel blinking display device control data B16 or the panel blinking display device C28 for outputting the panel blinking sequence data B14 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. It is a control method.

[Explanation of Embodiment 5] FIG. 20 corresponds to an embodiment of Embodiment 5 which is composed of the processing steps [2] to [4] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure, and the composition of the fifth embodiment is as follows.

Blinking unitized data B07 (CAD attribute of the present invention) for specifying the blinking unit of a figure is input to generate, edit, and record blinking time series data B11 for changing a blinking display (not shown) in time series. N, which outputs the blinking time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series from the blinking time series data B11.
RGS processing step (FIG. 10),

Time series graphic display for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having unit coordinate graphic data B26 obtained by uniting a coordinate graphic with blinking unitized data B07 and flashing unitized data B07, and displaying a simulation graphic. NGEN to generate program E05 (Fig. 11)
Processing steps,

This is a display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05.

[Explanation of Embodiment 6] FIG. 21 corresponds to the embodiment of Embodiment 6 which is composed of the processing steps [1] to [4] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure, and the structure of Embodiment 6 is as follows.

A unit coordinate figure in which the coordinate data of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. Data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 (CA of the present invention
NCAD (FIG. 9) processing step of generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 and output image data B10b having a D attribute).

By inputting the blinking unitized data B07, blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display (not shown) in time series is generated, edited, recorded and output, and the simulation display is made from this blinking time series data B11. NRGS processing step (FIG. 10) of outputting blinking time series transmission data B12 that changes the time series

NGEN (FIG. 11) processing step for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 to generate a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic.

This is a display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing simulation display by inputting blinking time-series transmission data B12 and time-series graphic display program E05.

[Explanation of Embodiment 7] FIG. 22 corresponds to the embodiment of Embodiment 7 which is composed of the processing steps [2] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure, and the composition of the seventh embodiment is as follows.

The blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the figure is input, and the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series is generated, edited, recorded and output.
NRGS that outputs blinking time series transmission data B12 that changes the simulation display in time series (FIG. 10)
Processing steps,

Time series figure display for inputting blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having unit coordinate figure data B26 obtained by uniting a coordinate figure with blinking unitized data B07 and blinking unitized data B07, and displaying a simulation figure. NGEN to generate program E05 (Fig. 11)
Processing steps,

NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05,

By inputting the blinking time-series data B11, the figure blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the figure blinking display device C27 or the pattern blinking sequence data B13 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the figure blinking display device C27. And an NSEQ (FIG. 13) processing step for outputting.

[Explanation of Eighth Embodiment] FIG. 23 is an eighth embodiment which is composed of the processing steps [2] to [4] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of this, and the structure of the eighth embodiment is as follows.

The blinking unitized data B07 for specifying the blinking unit of the figure is input, and the blinking time series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series is generated, edited, recorded and output.
NRGS that outputs blinking time series transmission data B12 that changes the simulation display in time series (FIG. 10)
Processing steps,

Time series graphic display for inputting flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 having unit coordinate graphic data B26 obtained by uniting a coordinate graphic by flashing unitized data B07 and flashing unitized data B07, and displaying a simulation graphic. NGEN to generate program E05 (Fig. 11)
Processing steps,

NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing the simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05,

By inputting the blinking time series data B11 and the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, the panel blinking display device C2
8 for displaying the panel blinking display device control data B16 or the panel blinking display device C28 for outputting the panel blinking sequence data B14 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. It is a control method.

[Explanation of Ninth Embodiment] FIG. 24 corresponds to the embodiment of the ninth embodiment which is composed of the processing steps [1] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure, and the composition of the ninth embodiment is as follows.

A unit coordinate figure in which the coordinate data of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. Blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 and output image data B10b
NCAD (FIG. 9) processing steps to generate, edit, record and output

Blinking time-series transmission data for inputting the blinking unitized data B07, generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking time-series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series, and for further changing the simulation display in time series. NRGS (FIG. 10) processing step of outputting B12,

NGEN (FIG. 11) processing step of inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 and generating a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic.

NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05.

By inputting the blinking time series data B11, the pattern blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27 or the pattern blinking sequence data B13 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the pattern blinking display device C27. And an NSEQ (FIG. 13) processing step for outputting.

[Description of Embodiment 10] FIG. 25 is an embodiment 10 which includes processing steps [1] to [4] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7. It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of this, and the structure of Embodiment 10 is as follows.

A unit coordinate figure in which the coordinate data of the pattern B02, the physical pattern information B03, the input coordinate figure data B06a, the input image data B10a, etc. are unitized by the blinking unitized data B07 that specifies the blinking unit of the figure. Blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 having data B26 and blinking unitized data B07 and output image data B10b
NCAD (FIG. 9) processing steps to generate, edit, record and output

Blinking time-series transmission data for inputting the blinking unitized data B07, generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking time-series data B11 for changing the blinking display in time series, and for further changing the simulation display in time series. NRGS (FIG. 10) processing step of outputting B12,

NGEN (FIG. 11) processing step for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 to generate a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic.

NDSP (FIG. 12) processing steps for executing simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05,

By inputting the blinking time series data B11 and the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, the panel blinking display device C2
8 for displaying the panel blinking display device control data B16 or the panel blinking display device C28 for outputting the panel blinking sequence data B14 recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. It is a control method.

[Explanation of Eleventh Embodiment] FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram showing that in one of the fifth to tenth embodiments, one computer is used to transmit the blinking time series transmission data B12 by an auxiliary storage device. It is a step diagram of Embodiment 11 which performs a simulation display.

In the eleventh embodiment, during the processing of the blinking time series program NRGS processing step for outputting the blinking time series transmission data B12 for changing the simulation display in time series, the blinking time series transmission data B12 is stored in the auxiliary storage device (blinking). Storing in the time-series transmission data storage device C14),

After the flashing time series program NRGS processing step is finished, the flashing unit coordinate graphic data B08 is inputted to generate a time series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic. Start the processing step,
A step of generating a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08,

This is a method for controlling the display of an advertising medium, which comprises the step of executing a simulation display by means of the blinking time-series transmission data B12 and the time-series graphic display program E05.

[Explanation of Twelfth Embodiment] FIG. 27 is a block diagram of the fifth or seventh or eighth embodiment, in which the blinking time-series transmission data B12 is transferred to the first communication means C by using two computers.
21 is a step diagram of embodiment 12 for transmitting by 21 to execute a simulation display. FIG.

The twelfth embodiment relates to the second computer CP.
U2 starts the time-series graphic display program generation program NGEN processing step for generating the time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying the simulation graphic, and displays the simulation graphic from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08. Graphic display program E05
And a second computer C through the first communication means C21 from the first computer CPU1.
Transmitting the blinking time-series transmission data B12 to PU2,

The second computer CPU2 controls the blinking time series transmission data B12 and the time series graphic display program E0.
5, the method of controlling the display of an advertising medium, the method including the step of executing a simulation display.

[Explanation of thirteenth embodiment] FIG. 28 shows that in the sixth, ninth or tenth embodiment, two computers are used to transmit the blinking time-series transmission data B12 by the first communication means C21, and the blinking is performed. Unit coordinate figure data B08
FIG. 13 is a step diagram of the thirteenth embodiment in which the simulation display is executed by transmitting the C.

The thirteenth embodiment is the first computer CP.
Transmitting the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 from U1 to the second computer CPU2 through the second communication means C22;

The second computer CPU2 displays a time-series graphic display program E for displaying a simulation graphic.
Starting a program NGEN processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program for generating 05, and generating a time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying a simulation graphic from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08,

From the first computer CPU1 to the second computer CPU2 through the first communication means C21,
The step of transmitting the blinking time series transmission data B12, and the second computer CPU2
12 and a time-series graphic display program E05, and a step of executing a simulation display is provided.

[Description of Embodiment 61] FIG. 79 described later.
Is a blinking unitization function of the CAD function of the present invention, which is a blinking unitization of the blinking unitization data B07 for generating the unit coordinate figure data B26 of FIG. 80 by blinking the coordinate figure data shown in FIG. It is a data diagram.

Embodiment 61 is Embodiment 3 or 4 or 6.
Alternatively, the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 of 9 or 10 specifies the blinking unit of the graphic including the unit number or the unit number and the group number.
9) (CAD attribute of the present invention), color, pattern, line type,
Unit coordinate figure data B26 in which a coordinate figure including a line width and a segment is unitized by blinking unitized data B07.
(FIG. 80), which is a display control method for an advertising medium.

[Explanation of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30] FIG. 29 is a diagram corresponding to the embodiments 14 to 22 of the NCAD processing step for outputting the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 shown in FIG. 30 likewise embodiment 23.
It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of 35 thru | or 35. Figure unitization C of FIG.
As described above, the AD program NCAD has an image input function NC1 for [1] reading the physical pattern information B03 by the image input device C04 and generating image data B10 in the main storage device, and [2] input image data B10a. And an input image data interface NC2 for generating image data B10 in the main storage device, and [3] Inputting coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01 to generate image data B10 in the main storage device. A paint function NC3 having a function and an image editing function of correcting the image data B10 generated by any of the above [1] to [3],

[4] An input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 for reading the input coordinate graphic data B06a and generating the coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory; [5] A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. Coordinate graphic data B06 input by the above [4]
Editing function for editing An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above [1] to [3], and D. The coordinate graphic data B06 generated by [4] or [5] is converted into blinking unit data by blinking unitized data B07, and unit coordinate graphic data B26 and blinking unitized data B0 are generated.
A CAD function NC5 having a blinking unitizing function for generating blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 having

[6] To perform operations such as image display deletion, scrolling, and screen redisplay of the screen displayed on the display when generating or editing the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 from the image data B10 or the coordinate graphic data B06 Screen operation function NC6, and [7] setting the file name, storing the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 of the set first file name, and setting the second file. Output image data B10 to the image storage device C05
a file function NC7 for storing b, and [8] a communication function NC8 for transmitting the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 to a sub program generation program NGEN operation step described later,

[9] Drawing output function NC9 for drawing the output coordinate figure B05b from the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 on the drawing apparatus C18, and [10] printing the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 to the printing apparatus C17.
[11] A hard copy function NC11 for copying the image data displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C19.

29 or 30, (1) to (9) and [9] to [11] are described in the following description of the embodiments (1) to (9) and [9] to [9]. 11] It is shown that it is the same as the configuration of.

[Explanation of the fourteenth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 29, among the above NC1 to NC11, (1) the physical pattern information B03 is stored in the image input device C04.
An image input function NC1 for reading and reading the image data B10 in the main memory, (2) a paint function NC3 using an image editing function for modifying the created image data B10, and (3) modified image data B10. A CAD function NC5 using an image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the above and a blinking unitization function for generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06. 4)
The display control method for an advertising medium according to the third or fourth or sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the screen operation function NC6 and the (5) file function NC7.

[Explanation of the fifteenth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 29, among the above NC1 to NC11, (1) an input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates the image data B10 in the main storage device, and (2) the generated image data. B
Paint function N using the image editing function to modify 10
C3 and (3) an image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the corrected image data B10 and a blinking unit for generating blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06. The display control method of the advertising medium according to the third or fourth or sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the CAD function NC5 using the computerized function, (4) screen operation function NC6, and (5) file function NC7. .

[Description of Embodiment 16] Embodiment 16 is
As shown in FIG. 29, among the above NC1 to NC11, (1) the coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C0.
1 to generate image data B10 in the main storage device, and a paint function NC3 that uses an image editing function to correct the generated image data B10, and (2) coordinate graphics from the generated or modified image data B10. CAD function NC5 using the image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating the data B06 and the blinking unitization function for generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06 as a blinking unit, and (3) screen Operation function NC6
And (4) the file function NC7, the display control method of the advertising medium according to the third or fourth or sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment.

[Description of Embodiment 17] Embodiment 17 is
As shown in FIG. 29, among the above NC1 to NC11, (1) the input coordinate graphic data B06a is read,
An input coordinate figure data interface NC4 for generating coordinate figure data B06 in the main storage device, (2) an editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06, and a blinking unit coordinate figure for blinking the edited coordinate figure data B06. A CAD function NC5 using a blinking unitizing function for generating data B08, and (3) a screen operation function NC6,
(4) Embodiment 3 comprising file function NC7
Alternatively, it is the display control method of 4 or 6 or 9 or 10.

[Explanation of the eighteenth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 29, among the above NC1 to NC11, (1) A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and C.I. A CAD function NC5 using a blinking unitization function that blinks the generated or edited coordinate figure data B06 into blinking units to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, (2) screen operation function NC6, and (3) file function NC7. Embodiment 3 consisting of
Alternatively, it is the display control method of 4 or 6 or 9 or 10.

[Description of Embodiment 19] Embodiment 19 is
As shown in FIG. 29, which is an embodiment in which NC3 is added to the seventeenth embodiment, (1) An input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 for reading the input coordinate graphic data B06a and generating the coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device. (2) A. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and B. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated or edited according to (3) below, and C. B. above. The CAD function NC5 using the blinking unitization function of generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the coordinate figure data B06 generated in step (3), and (3) A. of (1) or (2) above. A paint function NC3 using a coordinate graphic overlap image generation function for generating image data B10 from the coordinate graphic data B06 generated or edited by the above and an image editing function for correcting the generated image data B10, and (4) screen operation function NC6 And (5) File function NC7
Alternatively, it is the display control method of 4 or 6 or 9 or 10.

[Description of Embodiment 20] Embodiment 20 is
As shown in FIG. 29, an embodiment in which NC3 is added to the eighteenth embodiment, wherein (1) A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C0.
A drawing function for inputting data from No. 1 to generate coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory, and B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate graphic data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated or edited according to (2) below, and D. The above C. The CAD function NC5 using the blinking unitizing function that blinks the coordinate figure data B06 generated in step 6 to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, and (2) A. of (1) above. Or B. A paint function NC3 using a coordinate figure overlap image generation function for generating image data B10 from the coordinate figure data B06 generated or edited by the above and an image editing function for correcting the generated image data B10, and (3) screen operation function NC6 And (4) a file function NC7
Alternatively, it is the display control method of 4 or 6 or 9 or 10.

[Description of Embodiment 21] Embodiment 21 is
As shown in FIG. 29, which is an embodiment in which NC2 is added to the fourteenth embodiment, and (1) an image input in which the physical pattern information B03 is read by the image input device C04 and the image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. Function NC1 and (2)
The input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates the image data B10 in the main storage device, and (3) the coordinate data of the design B02 is input from the coordinate input device C01, and the image data B is stored in the main storage device.
10, a paint function NC3 using an image editing function for modifying the generated image data B10,
(4) From the corrected image data B10 to the coordinate figure data B
CAD function NC5 using the image overlap coordinate figure generating function for generating 06 and the blinking unitizing function for generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06 as a blinking unit, and (5) screen operation Function N
The display control method for an advertising medium according to the third or fourth or sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises C6 and (6) file function NC7.

[Description of Embodiment 22] Embodiment 22 is
As shown in FIG. 29, which is an embodiment in which NC4 is added to the twenty-first embodiment, (1) An image input in which the physical design information B03 is read by the image input device C04 and image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. Function NC1, (2) Input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates image data B10 in the main storage device, and (3) Input the coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01, A paint function NC3 having a drawing function for generating the image data B10 in the main storage device and an image editing function for correcting the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and (4) input coordinate graphic data Input coordinate graphic data interface N for reading B06a and generating coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device C4 and (5) A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and D. The above A. To C.I. The coordinate / graphic data B06 generated or edited in step B1 is converted into blinking units and the blinking unit coordinate / graphic data B is generated.
CAD function N that uses the blinking unitization function to generate 08
Embodiment 3 which comprises C5, (6) screen operation function NC6, and (7) file function NC7
Alternatively, it is the display control method of 4 or 6 or 9 or 10.

[Description of Embodiment 23] Embodiment 23 is
It is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 14 is replaced with NC8 as shown in FIG. 30, and (1) Physical pattern information B03.
An image input function NC1 for reading the image data by the image input device C04 and generating image data B10 in the main memory,
(2) A paint function NC3 that uses an image editing function to correct the generated image data B10, and (3) an image overlap coordinate figure generating function that generates coordinate figure data B06 from the generated and corrected image data B10 and this generated C using the blinking unitization function that blinks the coordinate figure data B06 to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data B08
AD function NC5, (4) screen operation function NC6,
(5) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 24] Embodiment 24 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 15 is replaced with NC8, and (1) Input image data B1
An input image data interface NC2 for reading 0a and generating image data B10 in the main memory;
(2) Paint function NC3 using the image editing function for modifying the generated image data B10, (3) Image overlap coordinate figure generating function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the corrected image data B10, and the generated coordinates CAD using the blinking unitization function of generating the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 by blinking the figure data B06
Embodiment 6 or 9 or 1 comprising a function NC5, (4) screen operation function NC6, and (5) communication function NC8
It is a display control method of 0 advertising media.

[Description of Embodiment 25] Embodiment 25 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 16 is replaced with NC8, and (1) the coordinate data of the design B02 is input from the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10 in the main storage device. And the generated image data B
Paint function N using the image editing function to modify 10
C3 and (2) an image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the generated or modified image data B10 and blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06. CAD function NC5 using the blinking unitization function,
(3) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the screen operation function NC6 and the (4) communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 26] Embodiment 26 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 17 is replaced with NC8. (1) The input coordinate graphic data B06a is read and the coordinate graphic data B is stored in the main storage device.
Input coordinate figure data interface N for generating 06
C4, and (2) a CAD function NC5 using an editing function of editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and a blinking unitization function of generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the edited coordinate figure data B06 into blinking units. , (3)
It is a display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises a screen operation function NC6 and (4) a communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 27] Embodiment 27 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 18 is replaced with NC8. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and C.I. A CAD function NC5 using a blinking unitizing function that blinks the generated or edited coordinate figure data B06 into blinking units to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, (2) screen operation function NC6, and (3) communication function NC8 It is a display control method for an advertising medium according to embodiment 6 or 9 or 10, which comprises

[Description of Embodiment 28] Embodiment 28 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of the nineteenth embodiment is replaced with NC8. (1) Input coordinate graphic data for reading input coordinate graphic data B06a and generating coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device. Interface NC4, and (2) A. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and B. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated or edited according to (3) below, and C. B. above. The CAD function NC5 using the blinking unitization function of generating the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the coordinate figure data B06 generated in step (3), and (3) A. of (1) or (2) above. A paint function NC3 using a coordinate graphic overlap image generation function for generating image data B10 from the coordinate graphic data B06 generated or edited by the above and an image editing function for correcting the generated image data B10, and (4) screen operation function NC6 And (5) the display control method for the advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 29] Embodiment 29 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 20 is replaced with NC8. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C0.
A drawing function for inputting data from No. 1 to generate coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory, and B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate graphic data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated or edited according to (2) below, and D. The above C. The CAD function NC5 using the blinking unitizing function that blinks the coordinate figure data B06 generated in step 6 to generate blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, and (2) A. of (1) above. A coordinate graphic overlap image generation function for generating image data B10 from the coordinate graphic data B06 generated by
Paint function NC3 that uses the image editing function to correct
And (3) a screen operation function NC6 and (4) a communication function NC8, which is the display control method for the advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment.

[Description of Embodiment 30] Embodiment 30 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of embodiment 21 is replaced with NC8, and (1) physical pattern information B0
3 is read by the image input device C04 and image data B10 is generated in the main storage device.
And (2) the input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates the image data B10 in the main storage device, and (3) the coordinate data of the design B02 is input from the coordinate input device C01 to the main storage device. The image data B10 is generated in the device, and the generated image data B1 is generated.
Paint function NC using the image editing function to correct 0
3 and (4) An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the corrected image data B10 and a blinking unit for generating blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 by blinking the generated coordinate figure data B06. This is a display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which is composed of a CAD function NC5 using a computerized function, (5) a screen operation function NC6, and (6) a communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 31] Embodiment 31 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 of Embodiment 22 is replaced with NC8. (1) Physical design information B03 is read by the image input device C04, and image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. Image input function NC1, (2) Input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates image data B10 in the main storage device, and (3) Input coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01. And a paint function NC3 having a drawing function for generating the image data B10 in the main storage device and an editing function for modifying the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and (4) input coordinate figure An input coordinate graphic data interface for reading the data B06a and generating coordinate graphic data B06 in the main memory. NC4, and (5) A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate graphic data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and D. The above A. To C.I. The coordinate / graphic data B06 generated or edited in step B1 is converted into blinking units and the blinking unit coordinate / graphic data B is generated.
CAD function N that uses the blinking unitization function to generate 08
The display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises C5, (6) screen operation function NC6, and (7) communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 32] Embodiment 32 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which NC7 is added to the thirty-first embodiment. (1) Image input in which the physical design information B03 is read by the image input device C04 and image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. Function NC1, (2) Input image data interface NC2 that reads the input image data B10a and generates image data B10 in the main storage device, and (3) Input the coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01, A paint function NC3 having a drawing function for generating the image data B10 in the main storage device and an editing function for correcting the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3); and (4) input coordinate graphic data B06a. Of the input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 for reading coordinate data and generating coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device. (5) A. The coordinate data of the design B02 is converted into the coordinate input device C.
01 to input coordinate graphic data B06 to the main storage device.
And a drawing function for generating B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate figure data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and D. The above A. To C.I. The coordinate / graphic data B06 generated or edited in step B1 is converted into blinking units and the blinking unit coordinate / graphic data B is generated.
CAD function N that uses the blinking unitization function to generate 08
The display control method for an advertising medium according to the sixth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises C5, (6) screen operation function NC6, (7) file function NC7, and (8) communication function NC8.

[Description of Embodiment 33] Embodiment 33 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which one or more functions of NC9 to NC11 are added to any one of the embodiments 14 to 22, and the added function is [9] output coordinate A drawing output function NC9 for drawing the graphic data B05b on the drawing device C18, and [10] blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is printed by the printing device C17.
Print function NC10 for printing on the screen and [11] Edit screen image data B10 displayed on the screen
This is a hard copy function NC11 for copying d to the hard copy device C19.

[Description of Embodiment 34] Embodiment 34 is
As shown in FIG. 30, it is an embodiment in which one or more functions of NC9 to NC11 are added to any one of the embodiments 23 to 31, and the added function is [9] output coordinate A drawing output function NC9 for drawing the graphic data B05b on the drawing device C18, and [10] blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is printed by the printing device C17.
Print function NC10 for printing on the screen and [11] Edit screen image data B10 displayed on the screen
This is a hard copy function NC11 for copying d to the hard copy device C19.

[Description of Embodiment 35] Embodiment 35 is
As shown in FIG. 30, the embodiment having all the functions of FIG. 9 is (1) an image input function NC1;
(2) Input image data interface NC2,
(3) Inputting the coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01, and modifying the image data B10 generated by any one of the above (1) to (3) with the drawing function of generating the image data B10 in the main storage device. A paint function NC3 having an editing function for (4) an input coordinate figure data interface NC4,

(5) A. A drawing function for inputting coordinate data of the design B02 from the coordinate input device C01 to generate coordinate graphic data B06 in the main storage device, and B. An editing function for editing the generated coordinate graphic data B06 and C.I. An image overlap coordinate figure generation function for generating coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated by any of the above (1) to (3), and D. The above A. To C.I. The coordinate / graphic data B06 generated or edited in step B1 is converted into blinking units and the blinking unit coordinate / graphic data B is generated.
CAD function N that uses the blinking unitization function to generate 08
C5,

(6) Screen operation function NC6, (7) file function NC7, (8) communication function NC8, (9) drawing output function NC9, print function NC10 and hard copy function NC11 are provided.

[Explanation of FIG. 31] FIG. 31 shows blinking time series data B11 and blinking time series transmission data B shown in FIG.
FIG. 41 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms of the implementation forms 36 to 41 of the NRGS processing step for outputting 12.

[0472] (1) to (3) described in FIG. 31 indicate that they have the same configurations as (1) to (3) described in the following description of the embodiments.

Flashing time series program NRGS of FIG.
As described above, [1] System function NR for controlling initialization of blinking time series data B11, execution of OS command, termination of NRGS, etc.
1 and [2] setting function NR2 that sets each condition at the time of executing the blinking time series data editing function and other functions, and [3] blinking unitized data B07 to blinking time series data B
A screen operation function NR3 for performing screen operations such as image display deletion, scrolling, and screen redisplay of the screen displayed on the display when editing 11.

[4] The file name setting function and the blinking unitized data B07 or N is added to the file having the set file name.
A blinking unitized data file function NR4 for storing blinking unitized data B07 of the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 input from the CAD processing step, and [5] blinking unitized data B07 for blinking time series data B1.
Blinking time-series data editing function NR5 that makes the time-series into 1 and [6] Blinking time-series data B11 with blinking time-series transmission data B12 including simulation display execution conditions such as transmission start, transmission end, and pause Time series transmission data B
Blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6
And [7] a blinking time series data file function NR7 for storing the blinking time series data B11 in the blinking time series data storage device C09 of the set file name, and [8] blinking time series transmission data storage of the set file name. A blinking time-series transmission data file function NR8 for storing blinking time-series transmission data B12 for transmitting the blinking time-series data B11 divided into time series (scenes) in the device C14;

[9] A communication function NR9 for transmitting the blinking time series transmission data B12 to a simulation display control program NDSP processing step described later, and [10] a printing function NR10 for printing the blinking time series data B11 on the printer C17. [11] Edit screen image data B10 displayed on the screen
and a hard copy function NR11 for copying d to the hard copy device C19.

Since NR1 to NR4 shown in FIG. 31 are all included in the following embodiments, the description in the description of each embodiment will be omitted.

[Explanation of Embodiment 36] Embodiment 36 is
As shown in FIG. 31, NR1 to NR4 of FIG.
Among the R5 to NR11, (1) the display control method of the advertising medium according to the first, second, third or fourth embodiment, which comprises the blinking time series data editing function NR5 and the blinking time series data file function NR7.

[Description of Embodiment 37] Embodiment 37 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 31, NR1 to NR4 of FIG.
Of the R5 to NR11, the display control method for an advertising medium according to the fifth or sixth embodiment is configured by (1) blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6 and (2) blinking time series transmission data file function NR8.

[Description of Embodiment 38] Embodiment 38 is
As shown in FIG. 31, NR1 to NR4 of FIG.
Of R5 to NR11, the display control method for an advertising medium according to the fifth or sixth embodiment is configured by (1) blinking time-series transmission data editing function NR6 and (2) communication function NR9.

[Description of Embodiment 39] Embodiment 39 will be described.
An embodiment in which the functions of NR5 and NR7 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 37, wherein NR1 to NR4, (1) blinking time series data editing function NR5 and blinking time series data file function NR7, and (2) blinking The embodiment 7 or 8 constituted by the time series transmission data editing function NR6 and (3) blinking time series transmission data file function NR8 is 9 or 1
It is a display control method of 0 advertising media.

[Description of Embodiment 40] Embodiment 40 is
An embodiment in which the functions of NR5 and NR7 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 38, wherein NR1 to NR4, (1) blinking time series data editing function NR5 and blinking time series data file function NR7, and (2) blinking The display control method for an advertising medium of embodiment 7 or 8 or 9 or 10, which comprises a time-series transmission data editing function NR6 and (3) communication function NR9.

[Description of Embodiment 41] Embodiment 41 is
An embodiment in which the function of one or both of NR10 and NR11 of FIG. 10 is added to the configuration of any one of the embodiments 36 to 40, wherein (1) any one of the embodiments 36 to 40 The display control method for an advertising medium according to the embodiment 36 or 37 or 38 or 39 or 40, which comprises the configuration of the embodiment and (2) one or both of the print function NR10 and the hard copy function NR11.

[Explanation of FIG. 32] FIG. 32 is an NGEN for generating the time-series graphic display program E05 shown in FIG.
It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of the processing steps embodiment 42-44.

[0512] (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 32 indicate that they have the same configurations as (1) and (2) described in the following description of the embodiments.

As described above, the time-series graphic display program generation program NGEN of FIG. 11 is [1] blinking unit coordinate graphic data B0 written in the main storage device directly or through the second communication means C22 described later.
8, a time-series graphic display subprogram generation function NG1 for generating a source program of the time-series graphic display subprogram for displaying a simulation graphic,

[2] A. B. A translation function that calls a ready-made translation program (compiler) and translates the generated source program of the time-series graphic display subprogram (in C language) to generate an object program of the time-series graphic display subprogram. Ready-made link editing program (linkage editor)
And a main program for control functions such as off-the-shelf hardware and the object program of the above-mentioned time-series figure display sub-program are linked-edited to generate a time-series figure display program E05.・ Link editing function (time-series graphic display program generation function)
NG2,

[3] A file function NG3 for reading the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 and writing it in the main storage device, and [4] a communication function NC8 of the NCAD processing step of the first computer. The communication function NG4 is provided for receiving the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 of the main storage device of the first computer to be transmitted and writing it to the main storage device of the second computer. The communication function NG4 and the communication function NC8 of the NCAD processing step form the second communication means C22.

Since NG1 and NG2 shown in FIG. 32 are all included in the following embodiments, the description in the description of each embodiment will be omitted.

[Description of Embodiment 42] Embodiment 42 is
As shown in FIG. 32, NG1 and NG2 in FIG.
(1) Embodiment 5 or 6 including the file function NG3
Alternatively, it is a display control method of 7 or 8 or 9 or 10.

[Description of Embodiment 43] Embodiment 43 is
As shown in FIG. 32, NG1 and NG2 in FIG.
(1) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the fifth or sixth or seventh or eighth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which is composed of the communication function NG4.

[Explanation of Embodiment 44] Embodiment 44 is
As shown in FIG. 32, the configuration of the embodiment 43 is provided with the function of NG3 of FIG. 11 added thereto, which is NG1 and NG2, and (1) file function NG3.
And a communication function NG4 (2)
Alternatively, 6 or 7 or 8 or 9 or 10 is a display control method for an advertising medium.

[Explanation of FIG. 33] FIG. 33 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms of the implementation forms 45 to 48 of the NDSP processing steps for executing the simulation display shown in FIG.

(1) to (3) described in FIG. 33 indicate that they have the same configurations as (1) to (3) described in the following description of the embodiments.

As described above, the NDSP processing step of FIG. 12 stores the blinking time-series transmission data B12 during the operation of the blinking time-series program NRGS when there is only one computer, and stores the blinking time-series transmission data B12. Program NRG
After S is stopped, the time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying the simulation graphic is activated to execute the simulation display. Therefore, when there is only one computer, the communication function ND4 is not used, and therefore the function [4] below is unnecessary.

[1] Whether the blinking time-series transmission data B12 written to the main storage device is blinked or not for each scene by the batch processing (batch processing) in [3] below or the real-time processing in [4]. The screen display RGB dot data B17 composed of color data and the display graphic of each unit displayed for each scene of the time-series graphic display program E05 read from the main memory is supplied to the simulation display execution device C26 (for example, the display C20). )
And a time series figure output from the [2] NGEN operation step and stored in the auxiliary storage device (time series figure display program storage device C15). Time series graphic display program starting function ND2 for writing the display program E05 in the main storage device
[3] Blinking time-series transmission data file function N that reads the blinking time-series transmission data B12 output from the NRGS operation step from the auxiliary storage device and writes it to the main storage device.
D3,

[4] A communication function ND4 for writing the blinking time-series transmission data B12 output from the main memory of the first computer to the first communication means C21 in real time to the main memory of the second computer, 5] Edit screen image data B10 displayed on the screen
hard copy function ND5 for copying d to hard copy device C19, and [6] video image data B10c for video storage device C.
And a video interface ND6 to be stored in 11f.

Since ND1 and ND2 shown in FIG. 33 are all included in the following embodiments, the description in the description of each embodiment will be omitted.

[Description of Embodiment 45] Embodiment 45 is
As shown in FIG. 33, ND1 and ND2 in FIG.
(1) Embodiment 5 or 6 or 7 or 8 or 9 or 1 which comprises a blinking time series transmission data file function ND3
It is a display control method of 0 advertising media.

[Description of Embodiment 46] Embodiment 46 is,
As shown in FIG. 33, ND1 and ND2 in FIG.
(1) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the fifth or sixth or seventh or eighth or ninth or tenth embodiment, which comprises the communication function ND4.

[Description of Embodiment 47] Embodiment 47 is,
As shown in FIG. 33, an embodiment in which one or both of the functions of ND5 and ND6 in FIG. 12 are added to the configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment, wherein (1) blinking time series transmission data file function ND3 and (2 ) A method of controlling display of an advertising medium according to an embodiment 45, which comprises one or both of a hard copy function ND5 and a video interface ND6.

[Description of Embodiment 48] Embodiment 48 is,
As shown in FIG. 33, an embodiment in which one or both functions of ND5 and ND6 in FIG. 12 are added to the configuration of the forty-seventh embodiment, wherein (1) blinking time-series transmission data file function ND3 and (2 ) A display control method for an advertising medium according to an embodiment 47, which comprises a communication function ND4 and (3) one or both of a hard copy function ND5 and a video interface ND6.

[Explanation of FIG. 34] FIG. 34 is recorded in the graphic blinking display device control data B15 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27 shown in FIG. 13 or the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the graphic blinking display device C27. It is a figure corresponding to the implementation form of the implementation forms 49 to 54 of the NSEQ processing step which outputs figure blinking sequence data B13.

34. (1) to (3) shown in FIG. 34 have the same configurations as (1) to (3) described in the following description of the embodiments.

[1] System function NS1 for controlling initialization of sequence data, execution of OS command, end of NSEQ step, etc. [2] Setting of blinking sequence data editing function and conditions for executing other functions Setting function NS2 to

[3] A blinking time-series data file function NS3 for writing the blinking time-series data B11 input from the NRGS processing step to the main storage device, and [4] (1) a function for re-editing the blinking time-series data B11. (2) To store in a plurality of chips forming the sequence program storage medium C24 as an aggregate,
Figure blink sequence data B1 divided into multiple data
Figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5 having a function of generating 3,

[5] A screen operation function NS6 for performing operations such as image display deletion, scrolling, and screen redisplay of the screen displayed on the display when editing the graphic flashing sequence data B13 from the flashing time series data B11. [6] The blinking time-series data B11 is used for the repeated blinking portion of the figure blinking display device C27 (in the actual blinking display unit),
A blinking display execution control function NS7 that is edited into the figure blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units for performing blinking such as the number of repetitions and pauses.

[7] The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device is written to the auxiliary storage device (graphic blink sequence data storage device C11a) and stored, or the data stored in the auxiliary storage device is read. Then, the figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 to be written in the main storage device, [8] Print function NS9 for printing the figure blinking sequence data B13 or the figure blinking display device control data B15 on the printer C17, and the [9] screen is displayed. Edited screen image data B10 being edited
and a hard copy function NS10 for copying d to the hard copy device C19.

NS1 to NS3 and N shown in FIG.
Since S5 and NS6 are all included in the following embodiments, the description in the description of each embodiment is omitted.

[Explanation of the forty-ninth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 34, NS1 to NS3 and N of FIG.
Of the functions of S5 and NS6 and NS7 to NS10,
(1) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the first embodiment, the third embodiment, the seventh embodiment, or the ninth embodiment, which comprises the blinking display execution control function NS7.

[Description of Embodiment 50] Embodiment 50 is
As shown in FIG. 34, NS1 to NS3 and N of FIG.
Of the functions of S5 and NS6 and NS7 to NS10,
(1) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the first embodiment, the third embodiment, the seventh embodiment, or the ninth embodiment, which comprises the graphic blinking sequence data file function NS8.

[Description of Embodiment 51] Embodiment 51 is
As shown in FIG. 34, which is an embodiment in which the function of NS8 in FIG. 13 is added to the configuration of the forty-ninth embodiment, and NS1 to NS3 and NS5 and NS6, and (1) blinking display execution control function NS7, 2) A display control method for an advertising medium according to an embodiment 49, which comprises a figure blinking sequence data file function NS8.

[Description of Embodiment 52] Embodiment 52 is
As shown in FIG. 34, an embodiment in which one or both functions of NS9 and NS10 of FIG. 13 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 49, and NS1 to NS3 and NS5 and NS are provided.
6 is a display control method for an advertising medium according to an embodiment 49, which is composed of (6) (1) blink display execution control function NS7, and (2) one or both of a print function NS9 and a hard copy function NS10.

[Description of Embodiment 53] Embodiment 53 is
As shown in FIG. 34, an embodiment in which one or both functions of NS9 and NS10 of FIG. 13 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 50, and NS1 to NS3 and NS5 and NS are provided.
6 and (1) Figure blinking sequence data file function N
S8 and (2) print function NS9 and hard copy function N
The display control method for an advertising medium according to the embodiment 50, which comprises one or both functions of S10.

[Description of Embodiment 54] Embodiment 54 is
As shown in FIG. 34, an embodiment in which one or both functions of NS9 and S10 of FIG. 13 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 51, and NS1 to NS3 and NS5 and NS6 are provided.
An embodiment 50 comprising (1) blinking display execution control function NS7, (2) graphic blinking sequence data file function NS8, and (3) one or both of the printing function NS9 and the hard copy function NS10. Is a method of controlling display of the advertising medium.

[Explanation of FIG. 35] FIG. 35 is recorded in the panel blinking display device control data B16 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28 shown in FIG. 14 or the sequence program storage medium C24 for controlling the panel blinking display device C28. NSE that outputs panel blink sequence data B14
It is a figure corresponding to the aspect of embodiment 55 thru | or 60 of P process step.

[0621] (1) to (3) described in FIG. 35 indicate that they have the same configurations as (1) to (3) described in the following description of the embodiments.

[1] System function NP1 for controlling initialization of sequence data, execution of OS command, completion of NSEP step, etc., and [2] Setting of blinking sequence data editing function, conditions for executing other functions, etc. Setting function NP2 to

[3] A blinking time-series data file function NP3 for writing the blinking time-series data B11 input from the NRGS processing step to the main storage device, and [4] blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 input from the NCAD processing step. A blinking unit coordinate figure data file function NP4 to be written in the main memory,

[5] (1) A function of re-editing the blinking time series data B11, and (2) Division into a plurality of data for storage in a plurality of chips forming the sequence program storage medium C24 as an aggregate. Panel blink sequence data editing function NP5 having a function of generating the panel blink sequence data B14, and [6] image display of the screen displayed on the display when editing the panel blink sequence data B14 from the blink time series data B11. Screen operation function NP6 for operations such as deletion, scrolling, screen re-display,

[7] Panel blinking in which the blinking time-series data B11 is divided into blinking display units for performing blinking such as the repeated blinking portion of the panel blinking display device C28 (actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions, pause, etc. The blinking display execution control function NP7 to be edited in the display device control data B16 and [8] The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device is written and stored in the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b). Alternatively, the panel flashing sequence data file function NP8 for reading the data stored in the auxiliary storage device and writing it in the main storage device, and [9] the panel flashing sequence data B14 or the panel flashing display device control data B16 to the printing device C17. Print function NP9 to print and displayed on the [10] screen Focusing screen image data B10
and a hard copy function NP10 for copying d to the hard copy device C19.

Since NP1 to NP6 shown in FIG. 35 are all included in the following embodiments, the description in the description of each embodiment will be omitted.

[Explanation of Embodiment 55] Embodiment 55 is
As shown in FIG. 35, NP1 to NP6 of FIG.
Of the functions of P7 to NP10, the display control method of the advertising medium according to the second or fourth or eighth or tenth embodiment is configured by (1) blinking display execution control function NP7.

[Explanation of Embodiment 56] Embodiment 56 is
As shown in FIG. 35, NP1 to NP6 of FIG.
Among the functions of P7 to NP10, the display control method of the advertising medium according to the embodiment 2 or 4 or 8 or 10 is configured by (1) panel blink sequence data file function NP8.

[Explanation of Embodiment 57] Embodiment 57 is
As shown in FIG. 35, which is an embodiment in which the function of NP8 of FIG. 14 is added to the configuration of the embodiment 55, and NP1 to NP6, and (1) blinking display execution control function NP7,
(2) Panel blink sequence data file function NP8
35 is a display control method for an advertising medium according to an embodiment 55 configured by

[Explanation of Embodiment 58] Embodiment 58 is
As shown in FIG. 35, an embodiment in which one or both functions of NP9 and NP10 of FIG. 14 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 55, and NP1 to NP6 and (1) blinking display execution control function NP7 (2) The display control method for an advertising medium according to the embodiment 55, which comprises one or both of the print function NP9 and the hard copy function NP10.

[Description of Embodiment 59] Embodiment 59 is
As shown in FIG. 35, an embodiment in which one or both functions of NP9 and NP10 of FIG. 14 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 56, and NP1 to NP6 and (1) panel blink sequence data file function NP8 And (2) one or both of the print function NP9 and the hard copy function NP10.

[Explanation of Embodiment 60] Embodiment 60 is
As shown in FIG. 35, an embodiment in which one or both of the functions of NP9 and NP10 of FIG. 14 are added to the configuration of the embodiment 57, which includes NP1 to NP6 and (1) blinking display execution control function NP7. , (2) panel blink sequence data file function NP8, and (3) one or both of the print function NP9 and the hard copy function NP10.

2. Generation, Editing, Recording and Printing of Advertising Coordinate Graphic or Image Generation, editing, recording and printing of Advertising coordinate graphics or image are used to implement the display control method of the advertising medium of the present invention of FIG. NCAD of the processing step diagram of the overall configuration
It is done in a processing step. Hereinafter, description will be made in the following order. (1) Hierarchy diagram of functions (FIGS. 36 to 51) (2) Operation procedure explanatory diagram of CAD mode and paint mode of NCAD processing step (FIGS. 52 and 53) (3) Overall concept and painting of NCAD processing step Flowcharts for selecting functions in the CAD mode and the CAD mode (FIGS. 54 to 56) (4) Flowcharts for reading the initial environment (FIGS. 57 to 59) (5) Flowcharts for setting the CAD mode and the paint mode (FIGS. 60 and 61) (6) Step diagram of blinking unit coordinate figure (FIG. 62) (7) Input procedure diagram (FIGS. 63 to 70) (8) Flow chart of image input function, drawing function and editing function (FIGS. 71 to 73) (9) ) Flowchart of coordinate figure drawing function, selection function, editing function and blinking unitization function (FIGS. 74 to 78) (10) Blinking unitization data Printout for fine unit coordinate graphic data (FIG. 79 through FIG. 82) (11) screen operation function, the flow chart of file function, printing function, drawings output function and a hard copy function (Fig. 83
To FIG. 87) (12) Flowchart from generation of image or coordinate graphic to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data (FIGS. 88 to 92) (13) Procedure of image overlap coordinate graphic generation display switching, setting and cancellation And a flow chart of the procedure for switching, setting, and releasing the coordinate graphic overlap image generation display (Fig. 93).
Through FIG. 96 (B))

[Explanation of FIG. 36 to FIG. 51] A hierarchical diagram of functions will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 51. Fig. 36
9 is an NCAD upper functional hierarchy diagram in which only the functions are extracted from the NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9 described above, and the upper functions are the same as the functions of the NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9 described above. The numbers of the middle-level function hierarchy diagram, which is a subdivision of the higher-level functions shown in the figure, are shown below. (1) CAD function NC5 (Fig. 37) (2) Paint function NC3 (Fig. 44) (3) File function NC7 (Fig. 48) (4) Printing function NC10 (Fig. 49) (5) Hard copy function NC11 (Fig. 50) (6) Image input function NC1 (FIG. 51) (7) Input image data interface NC2 (FIG. 5)
1) (8) Input coordinate figure data interface NC4 (Fig. 51) (9) Screen operation function NC6 (Fig. 51) (10) Communication function NC8 (Fig. 51) (11) Drawing output function NC9 (Fig. 51)

FIG. 37 is a CAD middle-level function hierarchy diagram showing the middle-level functions obtained by subdividing the CAD function and the numbers of the lower level hierarchical views. The numbers of the CAD middle-level function and lower-level function hierarchy diagram shown in the figure are shown below. (1) System control ... Controls the entire CAD program (FIG. 38). (2) Settings ... Various settings such as color and grid (Fig. 3
8). (3) Coordinate graphic drawing ... The coordinate graphic is drawn (FIG. 39). (4) Coordinate figure selection ... Preselects or cancels the figure to be edited (FIG. 40). (5) Edit coordinate figure ... Edit the selected figure (Fig. 4
1). (6) Blinking unit ... Identifying the blinking unit of the coordinate figure (FIGS. 42 and 43).

FIG. 38 is a system control setting function hierarchy diagram showing the system control function of the CAD function and the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing various setting functions such as color and grid, and the flowchart number (FIG. 60). The system control functions and various setting functions such as colors and grids shown in the figure are shown below. A. System control function (1) Clear ... Initializes coordinate figure data. (2) Execution of command: OS (operating system, JIS X0001-1987 01.04.05) command is executed. (3) End ... End NCAD. (4) Mode switching ... Switching between CAD mode and paint mode.

B. Various setting functions for colors, grids, etc. (1) Background color setting ... Setting the background color (back). (2) Coordinate graphic drawing color setting ... Set the coordinate graphic drawing color. (3) Switching the grid display on / off ... Switches between displaying and not displaying the grid. (4) Grid adjustment ON / OFF switching: Switches whether to adjust (round) input coordinates at grid intervals. (5) Selection of grid type ... A line grid or a point grid is selected. (6) Grid color setting ... Set the grid color. (7) Grid size setting ... Set the grid size (grid interval). (8) Change mouse color ... Change the display color of the mouse cursor. (9) Layer designation ... A layer (drawing layer) is designated. (10) Image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display ON / OFF
(Hereinafter referred to as ON / OFF) Switching ... Switches between displaying and not displaying the coordinate graphics screen on the image screen.

A layer (plotting layer) is a functional sheet function used by CAD software or the like. For example, if the display of the parts and the display of the dimensions are separately formed in different layers, it is possible to prevent only the dimensions from being displayed or to prevent writing.

FIG. 39 is a coordinate graphic drawing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate graphic drawing function of the CAD function and the flowchart numbers (FIG. 74). The coordinate figure drawing function shown in the figure is a function of creating a segment, and each function is shown below. In addition, each function is
It has one or more input methods. (1) Line drawing ... Single line segment, polyline (open polygonal line), polygon (closed polygonal line), super polygon (single line segment, polyline, circle, arc, ellipse, elliptic arc, etc.) To do. (2) Rectangle drawing: Draw a rectangle without inclination and a rectangle with inclination. (3) Circle / ellipse drawing ... Draw a circle, arc, ellipse, or ellipse arc. (4) Free curve drawing: Draw a spline curve. (5) Pen selection: Select color, type, and size.

FIG. 40 is a hierarchical diagram of the coordinate figure selecting function showing the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate figure selecting function of the CAD function and the numbers (FIG. 75) of the flowchart thereof. The coordinate figure selection function shown in the figure is a function of selecting or canceling a coordinate figure to be edited, and is as follows. (1) Single selection ... Designate one figure and make it an edit target. (2) Rectangle selection ... A graphic in a designated rectangular area is set as an editing target. (3) Single addition ... One figure is designated and added to the edit target. (4) Add rectangle ... Adds the graphic in the specified rectangle area to the edit target. (5) Single release ... Releases the specified figure from the editing target. (6) Rectangle release ... Releases the graphic in the specified rectangular area from the editing target. (7) Select all ... All figures are to be edited. (8) Release all ... Releases all figures from the editing target.

FIG. 41 is a hierarchical diagram of the coordinate figure editing function showing the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate figure editing function of the CAD function and the numbers (FIG. 76) of the flowchart thereof. The coordinate graphic editing function shown in the figure is a function for editing the selected coordinate graphic and is as follows. (1) Copy ... Copy the selected figure to the specified position. (2) Move ... Moves the selected figure to the specified position. (3) Delete ... Deletes the selected figure. (4) Rotate ... Rotates the selected figure (not save original shape and save original shape). (5) Shear ... Shear the selected figure (non-preservation of original shape and preservation of original shape). (6) Enlargement / Reduction: Enlarge or reduce the selected figure (non-preserving original shape and saving original shape). (7) Continuous copy ... The selected area is continuously copied with the specified parallel movement amount (X axis / Y axis), the number of times of copying, and the like. [Other Functions] (8) Invert ... Makes the selected figure symmetrical with respect to the specified axis or symmetrical with the specified point (non-preservation of original shape and preservation of original shape). (9) Change color ... Change the color of the selected figure. (10) Modify ... Modify the shape of the selected figure. (11) Earl ... Rounds the specified corner of the selected figure. (12) Edge ... Cuts the specified corner of the selected figure. (13) Connect ... Connects the start and end points of the selected figures. (14) Polygonization ... Convert connected figures into polygons. (15) Offset ... Generates the envelope of the selected figure. (16) Intersection inspection: Check whether the selected figure has a self-intersection.

FIG. 42 is a hierarchy diagram of blinking unitization function (1/1) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitization function of the CAD function and the numbers (FIGS. 77 and 78) of the flowchart thereof.
2). The blinking unitizing function shown in the figure is a function for collectively blinking a plurality of coordinate figures and is as follows. (1) Unit single designation ... One segment is made a unit. (2) Unit rectangle designation ... One or more segments within the rectangle range are combined into one unit. (3) Single unit addition ... One segment is added to the designated unit. (4) Add unit rectangle ... Add one or more segments within the rectangular range to the specified unit. (5) Single unit cancellation ... Deletes one segment from the specified unit. (6) Unit rectangle cancellation ... Deletes one or more segments within the rectangle range from the specified unit.

FIG. 43 is a blinking unitization function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitization function of the CAD function similar to FIG. 42 and the numbers (FIGS. 77 and 78) of the flowchart thereof. Is. The blinking unitizing function shown in the figure is a function for collectively blinking a plurality of coordinate figures and is as follows. (1) Group single designation ... One segment or unit is grouped. (2) Group rectangle specification ... One or more segments or units within the rectangular range are grouped into one group. (3) Add single group ... Adds one segment or unit to the specified group. (4) Add Group Rectangle ... Adds one or more segments or units within the rectangular range to the specified group. (5) Canceling single group ... Deletes one segment or unit from the specified group. (6) Group rectangle release ... Deletes one or more segments or units within the rectangle range from the specified group. (7) Group sequential confirmation: The information on the graphics grouped together is displayed in the order of group numbers. (8) Sequential confirmation of units: The information of the figures collected in the units is displayed in the order of the unit numbers. (9) Sequential segment confirmation ... Display segment graphic information in segment number order. (10) Individual segment confirmation ... Displays segment graphic information for each specified segment.

FIG. 44 is a paint intermediate function hierarchy diagram showing the intermediate function subdivided from the paint function and the numbers of the hierarchy diagrams below it. The numbers of the paint middle functional hierarchy diagram shown in the figure are shown below. (1) System control ... Controls the entire paint program (FIG. 45). (2) Settings ... Various settings such as color and grid are set (Fig. 4
5). (3) Drawing ... Generating an image (FIG. 46). (4) Selection of edit target ... Preselection or cancellation of the image range to be edited (FIG. 47). (5) Image editing ... Edit the selected image (FIG. 47).

FIG. 45 is a system control setting function hierarchy diagram showing the system control function of the paint function and the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing various setting functions such as colors and grids and the number (FIG. 61) of the flowchart thereof. The system control functions and various setting functions such as colors and grids shown in the figure are shown below. A. System control function (1) Clear ... Initializes coordinate figure data. (2) Command execution ... Executes an OS command. (3) End ... End NCAD. (4) Mode switching ... Switching between CAD mode and paint mode.

B. Various setting functions of color, grid, etc. (1) Background color setting ... Sets the background color. (2) Image drawing color setting ... The image drawing color is set. (3) Pen type setting ... Pen thickness, shape, etc. are set. (4) Switching the grid display on / off ... Switches between displaying and not displaying the grid. (5) Grid adjustment on / off switching: Switches whether to adjust (round) input coordinates at grid intervals. (6) Selection of grid type: A line grid or a point grid is selected. (7) Grid size setting ... Set the grid size. (8) Grid color setting ... Set the grid color. (9) Change mouse color ... Change the display color of the mouse cursor. (10) Layer specification ... Specify the layer (plotting layer). (11) Coordinate / graphics overlap (image generation) display ON / OFF switching: Switches whether or not to display the image screen on the coordinate / graphics screen.

A layer (plotting layer) is a functional sheet function used in CAD software or the like. For example, if the display of the parts and the display of the dimensions are separately formed in different layers, it is possible to prevent only the dimensions from being displayed or to prevent writing.

[0770] Fig. 46 is a subordinate function obtained by subdividing the drawing function of the paint function, and its flowchart number (Fig. 7).
It is a drawing function hierarchy diagram which shows 2). The drawing function shown in the figure is shown below. Each function has one or more input methods. (1) Line drawing: A single line segment, a polyline (open polygonal line), a polygon (closed polygonal line), and a superpolygon (a single segment, a polyline, a compound segment having an arc and an elliptic arc) are drawn. (2) Rectangle drawing: Draw a rectangle without inclination and a rectangle with inclination. (3) Circle / ellipse drawing ... Draw a circle, arc, ellipse, or ellipse arc. (4) Trajectory drawing: Draw [inking (JIS term)] the trajectory of the movement of the pointing device. (5) Character (string) drawing ... Character type selection, input character or character string) is displayed. (6) Pen selection: Select color, type, and size. (7) Fill ... Fills the area of the specified border color with the specified fill pattern. (8) Loupe ... Enlarges and displays the area to be edited.

[0780] Fig. 47 is an image editing function hierarchy showing the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the image editing function of the paint function and the flowchart numbers (Fig. 73). The image editing function shown in the figure is as follows. (1) Selection ... Designate an area to be edited. (2) Copy ... Copy the selected area. (3) Move ... Move the selected area. (4) Delete ... Use the background color. (5) Rotate ... Rotates the selected area (non-preservation of original shape and preservation of original shape). (6) Shear ... Shears the selected area (non-preservation of original shape and preservation of original shape). (7) Enlargement / reduction ... Enlarges / reduces the selected area (non-preservation of original form and preservation of original form). (8) Continuous copy ... The selected area is continuously copied with the specified parallel movement amount (X axis / Y axis), the number of times of copying, and the like. (9) Invert ... Inverts the selected area (non-preservation of original form and preservation of original form).

FIG. 48 is a file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the file function and the numbers (FIG. 84) of the flowchart thereof. The file functions shown in the figure are shown below. The sub-functions of the file function are as follows. (1) Target drive setting ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Target path setting ... Select or enter the path (directory) name of the data file. (3) Target file name setting ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Switch list display ... Switch between detailed mode and list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device. (7) Writing ... Writing and saving data in the auxiliary storage device (with overwrite confirmation).

FIG. 49 is a print function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the print function NC10 and the flowchart numbers (FIG. 85). The sub-functions of the printing function shown in the figure are shown below. The printing function NC10 prints the output coordinate graphic data (graphic information) and the heading portion (system information) in a character format on the printing device (printer C17). (1) Output destination selection ... Printer printing or file output is selected. (2) Output content selection ... Force coordinate graphic data or heading section is selected. (3) Printer device setting: The device type and the like are set. (4) Printing work: Printing with a printer or file output.

[0825] Fig. 50 is a sub-function obtained by subdividing the hard copy function NC11 and its flowchart number (Fig. 8).
FIG. 6 is a hard copy function hierarchy diagram showing 6). The sub-functions of the hard copy shown in the figure are shown below. The hard copy function makes a hard copy of the output image data. (1) Color / monochrome selection: Select color or monochrome. (2) Density setting ... Set the number of dots per inch. (3) Hard copy device setting: Set the device type and the like. (4) Gradation reversal setting ... Set whether or not to reversal the gradation. (5) Hard copy work

FIG. 51 is a sub-function that subdivides the image input function, the input image data interface, the input coordinate figure data interface, the screen operation function, the communication function, and the drawing output function, and the input output sub-function hierarchy showing the numbers of the flowchart. It is a figure. The input / output sub-functions shown in the figure are shown below. (1) The image input function NC1 reads physical design information from an image scanner, a video camera, etc., and writes it in the main memory to generate output image data. (2) The function of the input image data interface NC2 is to read existing CG data and write it in the main memory to generate output image data. (3) The function of the input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 is to read existing CAD data and write it in the main memory to generate output coordinate graphic data. (4) Screen operation function The subordinate functions of NC6 are scrolling for moving the display area up, down, left and right, whole area display for displaying all coordinate graphics so that they fit on the screen, redisplay and display area for redisplaying coordinate graphics or images. Is a zoom for enlarging / reducing (FIG. 83). (5) Communication function NC8 transmits unit coordinate graphic data or blinking unitized data. (6) The drawing output function NC9 draws the coordinate figure B05b by the drawing device (plotter) C18 (FIG. 87).

[Explanation of FIG. 52] FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the operating procedure in the CAD mode of the NCAD processing step, and the operating procedure is as follows. (1) The input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 reads the input coordinate graphic data B06a (existing CAD data) and writes it in the main memory to generate coordinate graphic data B06. (2) CAD function By the drawing function of NC5, design B0
Input the coordinate data of 2 from the coordinate input device C01,
Coordinate graphic data B06 is generated. (3) CAD function The coordinate graphic data B06 generated in (1) or (2) above is edited by the editing function of the NC5. (4) CAD Function The image overlap coordinate figure generation function of the NC 5 generates the coordinate figure data B06 from the image data B10 generated or edited in FIG. 53 described later. (5) CAD function By the blinking unitization function of the NC 5, the coordinate figure data B06 generated or edited in the above (1) to (4) is turned into a blinking unit, and the blinking unit coordinate figure data B is displayed.
08 is generated. (6) A file name is set by the file function NC7, and the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C0 of the file name in which the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 of the main storage device is set
Store in 7. (7) The communication function NC8 transmits the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 to the time-series graphic display program generation program NGEN operation step described later. (8) The blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is printed on the printer C17 by the print function NC10.

[Explanation of FIG. 53] FIG. 53 is an explanatory view of the operation procedure in the paint mode of the NCAD processing step.
The operating procedure is as follows. (1) The image input function NC1 is used to read the physical pattern information B03 from an image scanner, a video camera or the like and write it in the main memory to generate image data B10. (2) The input image data interface NC2 reads existing CG data and writes it in the main memory to generate image data B10. (3) Paint function With the drawing function of NC3, design B
The coordinate data of No. 02 is written in the main memory by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10. (4) Paint function The image editing function of the NC 3 is used to modify the generated image data B10. (5) Coordinate graphic data B06 generated or edited in FIG.
From the above, the image data B10 is generated by the coordinate figure overlap image generation function of the paint function NC3. (6) A file name is set by the file function NC7, and the output image data B10b of the main storage device is stored in the image storage device C05 having the set file name. (7) Output coordinate figure B0 by drawing output function NC9
5b is drawn by the drawing device C18. (8) The hard copy function NC11 is used to copy the output image data B10b by the hard copy device C19.

Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a flowchart of NCAD processing steps. [Description of FIG. 54] FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the overall concept of the NCAD processing step, in which the initial setting step and the initial environment data are read from the auxiliary storage device and written in the main storage device (hereinafter referred to as initial environment reading).
After executing the step, the step of loop 1 is started to switch between the paint mode and the CAD mode (hereinafter, referred to as mode switching), the paint mode and the CA.
The steps of loop 1 in D mode are ended. The functions described in the NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9 described above are selected in either the paint mode or the CAD mode.

[0902] In the above initial settings, the mode flag (a variable indicating that a certain condition is satisfied) is in the CAD mode, the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display is OFF (hereinafter referred to as OFF), and the grid display is ON. , Grid adjustment is off. When loop 1 is started and the mode flag is in the CAD mode, the function division of the flowchart shown in FIG. 55 is selected, and when the mode flag is in the paint mode, FIG.
When the function classification of the flowchart shown in is selected and the work of the selected function classification is completed, the loop 1 is ended.

[Explanation of FIG. 55] FIG. 55 is a flowchart for selecting a function in the CAD mode in the flowchart of FIG.
Until the J (End of Job) flag is turned on or the mode flag is set to paint, the steps of loop 2 consisting of inputting the function category and selecting the function category and ending the selection of the function category are repeated until loop 2 is executed. finish. The functional categories and procedures are as follows. (1) Various setting functions of colors, grids, etc. (Fig. 60) (2) CAD function Coordinate and graphic drawing function of NC5 (Fig. 74) (3) CAD function Coordinate and graphic selection function of NC5 (Fig. 75) (4) CAD function NC5 coordinate figure editing function (Fig. 76) (5) Color selection procedure (6) Blinking unitization function (Figs. 77 and 78) (7) Screen operation function NC6 (Fig. 83) (8) File function NC7 (Fig. 84) (9) Printing function NC10 (Fig. 85) (10) Hard copy function NC11 (Fig. 86) (11) Mode switching and EOJ flag ON (end of function category selection). After selecting the above function category and working on the selected first function category, select the next function category, work on the selected second function category, and so on. When the work for which the EOJ flag is turned on (function category selection end) is selected, the work for the function category is completed.

The NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9 described above shows only the functions corresponding to the externally connected devices, but the flowchart of FIG. 55 shows the functions operating in the CAD mode.

[Explanation of FIG. 56] FIG. 56 is a flow chart for selecting a function in the paint mode in the flow chart of FIG. 54, and the function classification is performed until the step of loop 3 is started and the mode flag becomes CAD. The steps of loop 3 consisting of input, function category selection and function category selection shown below are repeated to end loop 3. The functional categories and procedures are as follows. (1) Various setting functions such as color and grid (Fig. 61) (2) Image input function NC1 (Fig. 71) (3) Paint function NC3 drawing function (Fig. 72) (4) Paint function NC3 image selection function ( 5) Color selection procedure of paint function NC3 (6) Image editing function of paint function NC3 (Fig. 73) (7) Screen operation function NC6 (Fig. 83) (8) File function NC7 (Fig. 84) (9) Hard copy function NC11 (Fig. 86) (10) Formed from each mode switching operation.

After selecting the above-mentioned function category and performing the work of the selected first function category, the next function category is selected and the work of the selected second function category is performed. When the mode switching is selected repeatedly, the mode flag becomes CAD and the CAD mode shown in FIG.
Continue or end work in mode.

The NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9 described above shows only the functions corresponding to the externally connected devices, but the flowchart of FIG. 56 shows the functions operating in the paint mode.

[Explanation of FIGS. 57 to 59] FIG. 57 is a flowchart (1/3) of reading the initial environment.
Open the environmental data file open, EOF (End of File) flag and start the loop. 1
Reading a character string for one line, decomposing a character string for one line, and branching to the setting operation shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58 described later by the first character string (keyword) of the decomposed character string. When the determination of the first character string of the decomposed character string for one line is repeated in sequence and the end of the decomposed character string of one line of all lines is determined, the EOF flag is turned on, and will be described later. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, the loop is ended and the environment data file is closed.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart (2/3) of reading the initial environment, in which the first character string of the decomposed character strings for one line in FIG. 57 is discriminated to set the character strings of the same name. Then, determine the first character string of the next decomposed character string for one line, set the character string with the same name, and set the first character string of the decomposed character string for one line. Repeat until the end of all is determined.

(1) The setting work in the CAD mode includes the setting of the background color, the setting of the coordinate graphic drawing color, the ON / OFF switching of the grid display, the ON / OFF switching of the grid adjustment,
This includes setting work such as setting the grid color, setting the grid size, selecting the grid type (lines and points), and switching the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display on / off.

(2) The setting operation in the paint mode is performed by setting the background color, the coordinate graphic drawing color, switching the grid display on / off, switching the grid adjustment on / off, setting the grid color, and the grid size. This includes setting work such as setting, selecting grid type (lines and points), and switching ON / OFF of coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart (3/3) for reading the initial environment. The drive and path name settings for the character font file, the drive and path name settings for the NCAD message data file, and the NCAD image data file are made. Drive and path name setting, NCAD work file drive and path name setting, and color component setting corresponding to the palette number (nn).

[Explanation of FIG. 60] FIG. 60 is a flow chart of the setting function in the CAD mode, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, work classification input, work classification Select and perform the following work. The setting work categories are background color setting, coordinate figure drawing color setting (line color, line type), grid display on / off switching, grid adjustment on / off switching, grid type (line and point) selection. These operations include setting the grid size, setting the grid color, turning on / off the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display, specifying the layer (drawing layer), and turning on the EOP flag (end of function classification selection). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the setting work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 61] FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the setting function in the paint mode. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, work classification input, work classification Select and perform the following work. The setting work categories are background color setting, image drawing color setting, pen type (thickness, shape, etc.), grid display on / off switching, grid adjustment on / off switching, grid type (line and line Point) selection, grid size setting, grid color setting, coordinate graphic overlap (image generation) display on / off switching, and EOP
This is each work for which the flag is turned on (end of work category selection). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the setting work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 62] FIG. 62 shows the NCA of FIG.
D is a blinking unit coordinate figure data generation step diagram showing steps up to generating blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from image data or coordinate figure data in the D external connection function diagram. The description of (1) to (10) below is the same as the description of (1) to (10) shown in FIGS. 63 to 70, and therefore the description of FIG. 62 is omitted.

2.1 Method of Generating and Editing Coordinate Graphic for Advertising or Image The method of generating coordinate graphic for advertising is as follows.
As shown in the external connection function diagram and the blinking unit coordinate figure data generation step diagram of FIG. 62, it is as follows.

(1) Image input function N in paint mode
Using C1, the physical pattern information B03 is input by the image input device C04, and the image data B10 is generated. [Explanation of FIG. 63] In FIG. 63, the physical pattern information B03 is input by the image input device C04, and the image data B10 is input.
It is a physical pattern information input procedure figure which produces | generates, and the input procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54), switch to paint mode (Fig. 54) B. Design input setting Resolution setting (Fig. 71), reading range setting (Fig. 7)
1) C.I. Design input reading work (Fig. 71)

(2) In the paint mode, input image data B10 by the input image data interface NC2
By inputting a, image data B10 is generated. [Explanation of FIG. 64] FIG. 64 is an image data input procedure diagram for generating the image data B10 by inputting the input image data B10a by the input image data interface NC2, and the input procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54), switch to paint mode (Fig. 54) B. Reading file function selection (Fig. 55), file name setting (selection or input) (Fig. 84) and reading work

(3) Paint function N in paint mode
C3 is used to input the coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10. [Description of FIG. 65] FIG. 65 is an image data generation procedure diagram for generating the image data B10 by the drawing function of the paint function NC3, and the generation procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54), switch to paint mode (Fig. 54) B. Setting Coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display switching OFF
(Hereinafter, referred to as OFF) (FIGS. 58 and 61), switching of grid display ON or OFF (FIGS. 58 and 61), switching of grid adjustment ON or OFF (FIGS. 58 and 61), selection of trajectory drawing (FIGS. 72), selection of pen thickness (Fig. 72),
Selection of pen color (Fig. 72) C.I. Paint Paint the letters A to E (Fig. 72)

(4) In the CAD mode, the input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 inputs the input coordinate graphic data B06a to generate coordinate graphic data B06. [Explanation of FIG. 66] FIG. 66 shows input coordinate figure data B06a by the input coordinate figure data interface NC4.
Is a coordinate graphic data input procedure diagram for generating coordinate graphic data B06 by inputting, and the input procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54) B. Read file function selection (Fig. 55), file name setting (Fig. 84) and reading work

(5) CAD function NC5 in CAD mode
The coordinate figure drawing function is used to input the coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 to generate coordinate figure data B06. [Description of FIG. 67] FIG. 67 is a coordinate graphic data generation procedure diagram for generating the coordinate graphic data B06 by the coordinate graphic drawing function of the CAD function NC5, and the generation procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54) B. Setting image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching OFF (FIGS. 54 and 58), grid display switching ON or OFF (FIGS. 58 and 60), grid adjustment switching ON or OFF (FIGS. 58 and 60) , Grid size setting (FIG. 60), pen color selection (FIG. 74), polygon selection (FIG. 74) C.I. Outline drawing Character A outer shape, character A inner shape, character B outer shape, character B inner shape,
Character B inner shape, character C outer shape, character D outer shape, character D inner shape,
Trace of the outline of the letter E outline (Fig. 74) (plot)

(6) In the paint mode, the image data B10 generated in the above steps (1) to (3) is edited by the image editing function of the paint function NC3 to output the output image data B10b.

(7) CAD function NC5 in CAD mode
The image overlap coordinate figure generation function of (1) traces the contour of the output image data B10b generated in step (6) to generate coordinate figure data B06.

[Explanation of FIG. 68] FIG. 68 corresponds to (6) above.
Is an image overlap coordinate figure generation procedure diagram in which the contour of the output image data B10b generated in the step is traced and the coordinate figure data B06 is generated by the image overlap coordinate figure generation function of the CAD function NC5. It is as follows. A. The description from the start of NCAD to the painting of characters A to E is the same as that of FIG. B. Switch from paint mode to CAD mode (Fig. 5
6) C.I. Setting image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switch ON
(Hereinafter, referred to as ON) (FIG. 60, FIG. 93 to FIG. 94)
(B)), switching the grid display on or off (Fig. 6)
0), switching of grid adjustment ON or OFF (Fig. 6
0), selection of pen color (FIG. 74) D. Contour drawing Trace of letters A to E (Fig. 74)

(8) In the CAD mode, output the coordinate graphic data B06b from the coordinate graphic data B06 generated in the steps (4), (5) and (7) by the coordinate graphic editing function of the CAD function NC5. Output. (9) In the CAD mode, the blinking unitization function of the CAD function generates blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the output coordinate figure data B06b output in the step (8).

[Explanation of FIG. 69] FIG. 69 corresponds to the above (8).
Is a blinking unit coordinate figure data generation procedure diagram for generating blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the output coordinate figure data B06b output in the step by the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function. The generation procedure is as follows. . A. Unitization Characters A to E are unitized (FIGS. 77 and 78) B. Grouping Grouping characters A through E (Figs. 77 and 78)

(10) In the paint mode, the coordinate graphic data B06 generated in steps (4) and (5) above.
The output image data B10b is generated by the coordinate figure overlap image generation function of the paint function NC3.
The output image data B10b can be edited in the step (6) to generate the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 in the steps (7) to (9). In this method, a coordinate figure is created by the CAD function, the contour of the coordinate figure is traced by the paint function, and an image of a polygon (closed polygonal line) is generated.

[Explanation of FIG. 70] FIG. 70 shows the above (4).
And the coordinate figure data B06 generated in steps (5)
Is a coordinate graphic data generation procedure diagram for generating the output image data B10b by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function of the paint function NC3. The generation procedure is as follows. A. Start NCAD (Fig. 54), switch to paint mode (Fig. 54) B. Setting coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display switching on (FIGS. 61 and 95 to 96 (B)), grid display switching on or off (FIG. 61), grid adjustment switching on or off (FIG. 61) , Select trajectory drawing (Fig. 7
2), Pen thickness selection (Fig. 72), Pen color selection (Fig. 7)
2) C.I. Letter A paint to letter E paint (Fig. 72)

[Effect of Method of Generating and Editing Image] The effect of the method of generating and editing the image data of FIG. 62 described above is as follows. (1) Image input device C using the image input function NC1
In the method of inputting the physical pattern information B03 by 04 to generate the image data B10, the predetermined logo mark or the pattern (draft) created by the designer can be input to the computer at high speed and easily. (2) The input image data B10a is input by the input image data interface NC2 to obtain the image data B10.
In the method of generating, the existing CG data can be input to the computer quickly and easily. (3) Using the paint function NC3, the coordinate data of the design B02 is input by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10. B10 can be generated. (4) The painting function The method of editing the image data B10 by the editing function of the NC3 can easily and easily modify and change the design. (5) With the method of generating the output image data B10b from the coordinate figure data by the coordinate figure overlap image generation function, the output image data B10b can be generated quickly and easily, and the output image data B10b can be edited. .

[(Blinking unit) Effect of method of generating and editing coordinate graphic data] The effect of the method of generating and editing the coordinate graphic data and the flashing unit coordinate graphic data of FIG. 62 is as follows. (1) The input coordinate figure data interface NC4 inputs the input coordinate figure data B06a (existing CAD data) to generate the coordinate figure data B06, and the coordinate figure data B06 can be generated quickly and easily. it can. (2) CAD function The coordinate figure drawing function of the NC5 is used to input coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the coordinate figure data B06. Data B06 can be generated.

(3) CAD Function The image overlap coordinate figure generation function of the NC 5 can trace the contour of the image data B10 to interactively and efficiently and easily generate the coordinate figure data B06. (4) Image data B10 is generated from the output coordinate graphic data B06b by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function, the image data B10 is edited, and the edited output coordinate graphic data is edited again from the edited image data B10. B06b can be generated. Therefore, even the output coordinate graphic data B06b once created can be returned to an image, and the design can be easily modified and changed.

(5) CAD Function The method of editing the coordinate graphic data B06 by the coordinate graphic editing function of the NC5 can interactively and efficiently and easily edit. (6) By the blinking unitization function of the CAD function, the output coordinate figure data B06b to the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08
In the method of generating, blinking time series data B11, which will be described later, can be generated quickly and easily from the generated blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08.

[Explanation of FIG. 71] FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the image input function NC2 of the paint function in the paint mode, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, and the operation is started. Enter the category, select the category of work, and perform the following work. Image input work classification is color monochrome selection, resolution setting, zoom ratio setting,
These operations are reading range setting, reading density selection, dither type selection, reading, and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the image input work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 72] FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the drawing function NC3 of the paint function in the paint mode, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, and the work classification is started. Input, select work category and perform the following work. Drawing work classification is line drawing [single line segment, polyline drawing (open polygonal line), polygon drawing (closed polygonal line), super polygon drawing], rectangle drawing, circle / ellipse drawing, trajectory drawing, character (string)
These operations are drawing, pen selection [pen type, pen size, pen color], filling, screen operation function (scrolling, zooming, etc.), and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. , When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the drawing work is terminated.

[Explanation of FIG. 73] FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the image editing function of the paint function NC3 in the paint mode. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, and the work classification is started. Input, select work category and perform the following work. For drawing work classification, save original shape or not save, copy, move, delete, rotate, shear, enlarge / reduce, continuous copy, loupe (enlarge the area to be edited) and turn on the EOP flag (end work division selection) It is each work of. After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the editing work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 74] FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure drawing function (coordinate figure drawing element selection work) of the CAD function in the CAD mode, with the EOP (end of procedure) flag turned off. , The step of the loop is started, work category input, work category selection and the following work are executed. The work classification of graphic elements is line drawing [single line segment, polyline drawing (open polygonal line), polygon drawing (closed polygonal line), super polygon drawing], rectangle drawing, circle / arc / ellipse / elliptic arc drawing, free curve drawing , Pen selection (pen type, pen size, pen color) and the like, screen operation functions (scrolling, zooming, etc.), and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the drawing work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 75] FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure selecting function of the CAD function NC5 in the CAD mode, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off and the loop step is started. Input work categories, select work categories, and perform the following tasks. The selected work category is
Single selection, rectangle selection, single addition, rectangle addition, single release,
These operations are rectangle release, all selection, all release, etc. and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. , EOP
When the work for which the flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the editing work ends. The coordinate graphic selection work described in FIG. 76 is performed on the graphic selected by the above work.

[Explanation of FIG. 76] FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure editing function of the CAD function NC5 in the CAD mode, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off and the steps of the loop are started. Enter the category, select the category of work, and perform the following work. As for the drawing work classification, the original shape preservation or non-preservation setting, copy, move, delete, rotation, shear, enlargement / reduction, continuous copying, other functions (the work described in FIG. 41) and the EOP flag ON (end of work division selection end) ) Is each work. After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the editing work ends.

[Explanation of FIGS. 77 and 78] FIG.
In the flowchart (1/2) of the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function NC5 in the D mode, the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, and the steps of the loop are started.
The work is input, the work is selected, and the work shown in FIG.

[1005] FIG. 78 is a CAD function N in the CAD mode.
It is a flowchart (2/2) of the blinking unitizing function of C5, which is formed by the following steps of work division, loop end and the like. The drawing work classification is unit single designation, unit rectangle designation, unit single addition, unit rectangle addition, unit single release, unit rectangle release, group single designation, group rectangle designation, group single addition, group rectangle addition, Group single cancellation, group rectangle cancellation, group sequential confirmation, unit sequential confirmation, segment sequential confirmation,
These are operations of individual confirmation of segment and turning on of EOP flag (end of selection of work category). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. , If the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the blinking unitized work ends.

[1010] [Explanation of FIGS. 79 to 81] FIG.
FIG. 81 is a blinking unitized data diagram showing blinking unitized data B07 for producing the unit coordinate figure data B26 of FIG. 80 by making the coordinate figure data shown in FIG. 4 into blinking units by the blinking unitizing function of the AD function. .

In the figure, since the letters A, B, C, D and E respectively form a unit, the number of units is 5, and as shown in FIG. 2 described above, [ABCDE]
Blinking the advertisement display of 12 causes 12 states that change in time series, and blinking all 12 states causes a maximum of 12 scenes of blinking display. In addition, [F] described in the drawing indicates that it is the foreground.

[1014] FIG. 80 is a unit showing the data of the embodiment in which unit coordinate graphic data B26 is generated from the coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 4 by the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function and printed using the printing function. It is a coordinate figure data figure.

[1016] In the figure, since the letters A, B, C, D, and E each form a unit, the number of units is 5, and [ABCDE] becomes one group to blink the advertisement display. Since there are no other groups to blink,
The number of groups is one. The coordinate data is the inflection point X coordinate value and Y coordinate value of each character of the same coordinate figure [ABCDE] as in FIG. 1 (outer portion of A, triangular portion of A, outer portion of B,
Coordinate data of the upper part inside B, the lower part inside B, etc.). Further, the above-mentioned outer shape portion of A, triangular portion of A, outer shape portion of B, upper portion inside B, lower portion inside B, outer shape of C, outer shape of D, inner shape of D and outer shape of E are , Is formed by nine closed polygonal lines (polygons). Since these closed polygonal lines form a segment serving as a figure unit, the number of segments is nine.

[1018] Fig. 81 is a unit coordinate graphic data explanatory diagram explaining data of the embodiment of the unit coordinate graphic data B26 shown in Fig. 80.

[1020] FIG. 82 shows a list of data of an embodiment in which the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 is generated from the coordinate figure data shown in FIG. 4 by the blinking unitizing function and is printed by using the printing function. It is a blinking unit coordinate figure data list figure.

[1022] The data in the figure are as follows. (1) Group No ... Since the number of groups is 1, it is group No. 1. (2) Note: The group name is GRP-UP. (3) F / B: means foreground or background, and indicates foreground (F). (4) Unit No ... Unit Nos. 1 to 5 of A, B, C, D and E. (5) Note: Unit names are UNIT-A, UNIT-B, UNIT-
C, UNIT-D and UNIT-E. (6) Segment No ... UNIT-A is 1 and 2, UNIT-B is 3 to 5, UNIT-C is 6, UNIT-D is 7 and 8, and UNIT-E is 9.

[1030] [Explanation of FIG. 83] FIG. 83 shows a screen operation function N.
It is a flowchart of C6, and ends when the operation is completed by selecting the following work categories. The above work categories can be selected by scrolling (right, top right, top, top left, left, bottom left, bottom,
Lower right), zoom (enlarge, reduce) and screen re-display.

2.2 Recording Method of Image Data and Coordinate and Graphic Data The recording method of the image data and the coordinate and graphic data is described in N of FIG.
Using the file function NC7 of the CAD processing step,
As described below, the data is written from the main storage device to the auxiliary storage device for recording, and read from the auxiliary storage device and written to the main storage device. (1) The output image data B10b is stored in the image storage device C05.
Remember. (2) The output coordinate graphic data B06b is stored in the coordinate graphic storage device C02. (3) The blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 is stored in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07.

The procedure for recording the output image data B10b, the output coordinate graphic data B06b, or the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is the order of the file function selection, the file name selection, and the input and write operations.

[Explanation of FIG. 84] FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the file function NC7, and shows the output image data B1.
0b or output coordinate graphic data B06b or blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is shown as a file function. EO
The P (Procedure end) flag is turned off, the step of the loop is started, work category input, work category selection, and the following work are executed. The work classifications are list display switching, drive setting, path name setting, file name setting (selection or input), coordinate figure data reading, coordinate figure data writing, blinking unit coordinate figure data writing, blinking unit coordinate figure data reading, These are operations of reading output image data, writing output image data, and turning on the EOP flag (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the editing work ends.

[1104] [Effect of recording method of image data and coordinate graphic data] [1100] The effect of the method of recording image data and coordinate graphic data is as follows. (1) With the file function NC7, the output image data B10b can be recorded in the image storage device C05 efficiently and easily without consuming the image material, and the storage space can be reduced. (2) With the file function NC7, the output coordinate graphic data B0 can be efficiently and easily used without consuming an image material.
6b can be recorded in the coordinate figure storage device C02,
The storage space can be reduced. (3) The flickering unit coordinate graphic data B can be efficiently and easily provided by the file function NC7 without consuming an image material.
08 can be recorded in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07, and the storage space can be reduced.

(4) The image data or the coordinate graphic data stored by the above (1) to (3) can be read and edited efficiently and easily without consuming an image material. (5) The image data or the coordinate graphic data stored in the above (1) to (3) is read, and another image or coordinate graphic data is efficiently extracted from the image or the coordinate graphic data without consuming the image material. And can be easily generated.

2.3 Output Method of Image Data and Coordinate and Graphic Data The output method of the image data and the coordinate and graphic data is the same as that shown in FIG.
The drawing output function NC9, the print function NC10, and the hard copy function NC11 in the CAD processing step are used to output as follows. (1) The hard copy function NC11 is used to output the output image data B10b to the hard copy device C19. (2) Output coordinate figure B using drawing output function NC9
05b is drawn by a drawing device (plotter) C18. (3) Using the print function NC10, the output coordinate graphic data B06b is printed by the printing device (printer) C17. (4) Using the printing function NC10, the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 is printed by the printing device (printer) C17.

[Explanation of FIG. 85] FIG. 85 shows the print function NC.
10 is a flowchart of FIG. 10, wherein output coordinate graphic data B
06b or blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 is recorded. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the step of the loop is started, work category input, work category selection, and the following work are executed. The work categories are output destination selection (printer or file), output content selection (heading section or coordinate section), printer device setting, coordinate graphic data output (printing), and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). It is each work of. After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, the next work category is selected and the setting work for the selected second work category is performed. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the printing work ends.

[Description of Fig. 86] Fig. 86 is a flowchart of the hard copy function NC11, and shows a function of recording the output image data B10b. Turn off the EOP (end of procedure) flag, start the loop step,
Input work categories, select work categories, and perform the following tasks. The work classification is each work of selecting color or monochrome, setting of density, setting of hard copy device, setting of tone inversion, hard copy, and turning on of EOP flag (end of work classification selection). Select the work category above,
After the setting work of the selected first work classification, the next work classification is selected, the setting work of the selected second work classification is performed, and the operation of EOP flag is turned on (work classification selection) Select the (End) operation to end the hard copy operation.

[Explanation of FIG. 87] FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the drawing output function NC9, and the output coordinate figure B05.
The function of drawing b by the drawing device (plotter) C18 is shown. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the step of the loop is started, work category input, work category selection, and the following work are executed. The work classification is work such as setting of the paper size, setting of the plotter device, plotting, and turning on of the EOP flag (end of work classification selection). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. , EO
When the work for which the P flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the plotting work ends.

[Effect of Output Method of Image Data and Coordinate Graphic Data] The effect of the output method of image data and coordinate graphic data is as follows. (1) As for the method of outputting the coordinate graphic, the output coordinate graphic B05b can be efficiently and easily drawn by the drawing device (plotter) C18 using the drawing output function NC9 and easily visually confirmed. it can. (2) The printing method NC10 is used to output the coordinate graphic data.
Using, the output coordinate graphic data B06b can be printed efficiently and easily by the printing device (printer) C17, and can be easily visually checked.

(3) The image data output method uses the hard copy function NC11 and the hard copy device C19.
Thus, the output image data B10b can be efficiently and easily copied and visually confirmed. (4) The output method of the coordinate graphic data is not only to print the output coordinate graphic data B06b directly on the printer C17 but also to store and save the print data in the auxiliary storage device in a print format in a small storage space, and to save it later. It can be read and reused quickly and easily.

[Description of FIGS. 88 to 92] FIGS. 88 to 92 are flowcharts from the generation of an image or coordinate graphic to the generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data.

[1072] [Description of FIG. 88] FIG. 88 shows blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 after inputting physical pattern information B03.
Is a flow chart up to the generation of, and is formed from the following steps. (1) Image input device C using the image input function NC1
The physical pattern information B03 is read by 04, and the image data B10 is generated in the main storage device. (2) The image data B10 generated in the above step (1) is edited by the image editing function of the painting function NC3, and the output image data B10b is written and saved in the auxiliary storage device. (3) CAD function The image overlap coordinate figure generation function of NC5 traces the contour of the output image data B10b edited in step (2) above to generate coordinate figure data B06. (4) CAD function With the coordinate figure editing function of NC5,
Coordinate figure data B0 generated in step (3) above
6 is edited, and output coordinate graphic data B06b is output. (5) Output coordinate figure data B06 output in step (4) above by the blinking unitization function (segment unitization, unit grouping) of the CAD function
Flashing unit coordinate figure data B08 is generated from b. (6) The output image data B10b is stored in the image storage device C05.
Remember. (7) The output coordinate graphic data B06b is stored in the coordinate graphic storage device C02. (8) The blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 is stored and stored in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07. (9) The hard copy function NC11 is used to output the output image data B10b to the hard copy device C19. (10) Output coordinate figure B using drawing output function NC9
05b is drawn by a drawing device (plotter) C18. (11) Using the print function NC10, the output coordinate graphic data B06b is printed by the printing device (printer) C17. (12) Using the printing function NC10, the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is printed by the printing device (printer) C17. The steps (2), (4), (6), (7), and (9) to (12) described above are performed as necessary.

[1074] [Explanation of FIG. 89] In FIG. 89, the blinking unit coordinate figure data B0 after the input image data B10a is input.
8 is a flow chart up to the generation of 8 and is formed from the following steps. (1) The input image data interface NC2 reads the input image data B10a (existing CG data) and writes the image data B10 to the main storage device. (2) The following is the same as (2) to (12) in [Description of FIG. 88]. Note that (2), (4), (6),
The steps (7) and (9) to (12) are performed as necessary.

[Explanation of FIG. 90] FIG. 90 is a flowchart from generation of the image data B10 by inputting the coordinate data of the design B02 to generation of the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08, which is formed from the following steps. To be done. (1) Paint function Using the drawing function of NC3, the coordinate data of the design B02 is input by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10. (2) The following is the same as (2) to (12) in [Description of FIG. 88]. Note that (2), (4), (6),
The steps (7) and (9) to (12) are performed as necessary.

[Explanation of FIG. 91] FIG. 91 is a flowchart from the input of the input coordinate graphic data B06a to the generation of the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08, which is formed from the following steps. (1) The input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 reads the input coordinate graphic data B06a (existing CAD data) and writes the image data B10 in the main memory. (2) The coordinate graphic data B06 generated in the above step (1) is used to generate image data B10 by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function of the paint function NC3, and the image data is edited to output image data B10b. To generate. (3) The following is the same as (2) to (12) in [Description of FIG. 88]. In addition, (2) and (2) and (3) of [Explanation of FIG. 88], (4), (6), (7), and (9) to (12) of [Explanation of FIG. 88]. The steps are performed as needed.

[Explanation of FIG. 92] FIG. 92 is a flowchart from generation of coordinate graphic data B06 by inputting coordinate data of the design B02 to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08, starting from the next step. It is formed. (1) CAD function The coordinate figure drawing function of NC5 is used to input the coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the coordinate figure data B06 in the main storage device. (2) The coordinate graphic data B06 generated in the above step (1) is used to generate image data B10 by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function of the paint function NC3, and the image data is edited to output image data B10b. To generate. (3) The following is the same as (4) to (12) in [Description of FIG. 88]. In addition, (2) and (2) and (3) of [Explanation of FIG. 88], (4), (6), (7), and (9) to (12) of [Explanation of FIG. 88]. The steps are performed as needed.

[1150] FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a switching procedure for displaying the paint screen on the CAD screen in an overlapping manner. The working procedure is as follows. (1) Set to CAD mode. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Save the paint screen data in the save area and erase the screen display. (4) Display the CAD screen frame. (5) Display a color sample. (6) Turn on / off switching of image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display. (7) When the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching is turned on, the paint screen data saved in the save area in (3) is redisplayed on the screen. (8) When the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching is off, the work area of the CAD screen is cleared. (9) Display all segments. (10) Display the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above.

[1152] FIG. 94 (A) is a flowchart of the overlap setting procedure when the paint screen is overlapped on the CAD screen, and the work procedure is as follows. (1) It is determined whether the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching is on or off. When this switching is off, the following work is performed. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Read the paint screen data from the save area,
Redisplay all segments on the screen. (4) Display the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above. (5) Turn on the switching of image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display. (6) The process ends when the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching of (1) or (5) above is turned on.

[1154] FIG. 94 (B) is a flowchart of the overlap canceling procedure when the paint screen is overlapped on the CAD screen, and the working procedure is as follows. (1) It is determined whether the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching is on or off. When this switching is on, perform the following work. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Clear the CAD screen. (4) Read the data of the CAD screen from the storage area and redisplay all the segments on the screen. (5) Display the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above. (6) Turn off the switching of the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display. (7) The process ends when the image overlap (coordinate figure generation) display switching of (1) or (5) above is off.

[1160] FIG. 95 is a flowchart of a switching procedure for displaying the CAD screen on the paint screen in an overlapping manner. The working procedure is as follows. (1) Enter paint mode. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Display the paint screen frame. (4) Display a color sample. (5) The paint screen data saved in the save area in advance is displayed on the screen. (6) When the switching of the coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display is on, the CAD screen is displayed again and all the segments are displayed again. (7) When the switching of coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display is on or after the CAD screen is re-displayed in (6) above, the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above is displayed.

[1162] FIG. 96 (A) is a flowchart of the overlap setting procedure when the CAD screen is overlap-displayed on the paint screen, and the work procedure is as follows. (1) Determine whether the switching of coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display is on or off. When this switching is off, the following work is performed. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Save the paint screen data in the save area and erase the screen display. (4) Read the data of the CAD screen from the storage area and redisplay all the segments on the screen. (5) Display the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above. (6) Turn on the switching of coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display. (7) The process ends when the switching of the coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display of (1) or (6) is on.

[1164] FIG. 96 (B) is a flowchart of the overlap canceling procedure when the CAD screen is overlap-displayed on the paint screen, and the work procedure is as follows. (1) Determine whether the switching of coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display is on or off. When this switching is on, perform the following work. (2) Hide the mouse cursor. (3) Read the paint screen data from the save area,
Redisplay on the screen. (4) Display the mouse cursor hidden in (2) above. (5) Turn off the switching of the coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display. (6) The process ends when the switching of the coordinate figure overlap (image generation) display in (1) or (5) above is off.

[1200] 3. Blinking Time Series Data Generation, Editing, Recording, Output, and Printing Method The blinking time series data generation, editing, recording, outputting, and printing method is used to implement the advertising medium display control method of the present invention in FIG. NRG of the processing step diagram of the entire configuration
This is performed in the S processing step.

[1202] Hereinafter, the NRGS processing steps will be described in the following order. (1) Hierarchy diagram of functions (FIGS. 97 to 108) (2) Overall concept of NRGS processing steps, flowchart of initial environment reading and setting functions (FIGS. 109 to 111) (3) Blinking time series (transmission) data And screen operation procedure and flowchart (FIGS. 112 to 114) (4) Flashing time-series data generation and editing procedure explanatory drawing (FIGS. 115 to 119) (5) Flashing unitized data file function procedure explanatory drawing And a flowchart of the entire blink editing of the blinking time series data editing function and a flowchart of the blinking editing procedure (FIGS. 120 and 122) (6) Explanatory diagrams of the linear editing procedure (FIGS. 123 to 142) (7) of the blinking time series data Flowchart of scene editing and explanatory diagram of scene editing (FIGS. 143 to 153) (8) Flow of unit editing of blinking time series data -Chart and explanatory diagram of unit editing (Figs. 154 to 164) (9) Flow chart of entire file function and reading / writing procedure (Figs. 165 to 167) (10) Explanatory diagram of operating procedure of blinking time series data file of NRGS processing step (FIG. 168) (11) Operation procedure explanatory diagram and flowchart of blinking time-series transmission data editing function, blinking time-series transmission data file function and communication function (FIGS. 169 to 173) (12) Of blinking time-series data printing function Operation procedure explanatory diagram and flowchart (FIGS. 174 to 178) (13) Printing example of blinking time series data (FIGS. 179 to 18)
7) (14) Explanatory drawing of the hard copy operation procedure of the image data in the blinking time series data edit screen (Fig. 188) (15) Printing example of blinking time series transmission data (Fig. 189)

[1210] [Explanation of FIGS. 97 to 108] FIG.
7 to 108, a hierarchical diagram of the functions of the NRGS processing step will be described.

[1220] FIG. 97 is a NRGS upper functional hierarchy diagram in which only the functions are extracted from the NRGS external connection functional diagram of FIG. 10 described above. The upper functions are the NRGS of FIG. 10 described above.
It is the same as the function in the external connection function diagram. The numbers of the lower-level function hierarchy diagram, which is a subdivision of the higher-level function shown in the figure, are shown below. (1) System function NR1 (FIG. 98) (2) Setting function NR2 (FIG. 99) (3) Screen operation function NR3 (FIG. 100) (4) Blinking unitized data file function NR4 (FIG. 10)
1) (5) Blinking time series data editing function NR5 (FIGS. 102 and 103) (6) Blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6 (FIG. 10)
5) (7) Blinking time series data file function NR7 (Fig. 10)
4) (8) Blinking time series transmission data file function NR8 (Fig. 1
05) (9) Communication function NR9 (Fig. 106) (10) Printing function NR10 (Fig. 107) (11) Hard copy function NR11 (Fig. 108)

[1230] FIG. 98 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system function NR1. The system functions shown in FIG. 98 are shown below. (1) Clear ... Blinking Initializes the time series data. (2) Execution of command ... Execute an OS command. (3) End ... End NRGS.

[1240] FIG. 99 is a setting function NR2 at the time of editing blinking time series data (hereinafter, referred to as blinking time series data editing) and at the time of transmitting blinking time series transmission data (hereinafter, referred to as blinking time series transmission data transmission). FIG. 3 is a hierarchical diagram of the setting function obtained by subdividing, and the setting conditions described in the figure are shown below. (1) Cycle setting ... Blinking Set the transmission cycle when transmitting time-series transmission data. (2) Maximum number of units setting ... Set the maximum number of units when editing blinking time series data and transmitting blinking time series transmission data. (3) Start scene setting ... Set a start scene when blinking time-series data is edited and when blinking time-series transmission data is transmitted. (4) End scene setting ... Set the end scene when blinking time-series data is edited and when blinking time-series transmission data is transmitted. (5) Maximum scene setting ... Set the maximum scene during blinking time series data editing and blinking time series transmission data transmission. (6) Setting the number of display cells: Set the number of cells displayed on one screen (it is automatically redisplayed after setting). A. Default value ... Set to the default value of this program. B. Arbitrary ... Set the number of vertical and horizontal cells displayed on one screen. b1. Vertical direction: Set the number of cells in the vertical (scene) direction to be displayed on one screen. b2. Horizontal direction ... Set the number of cells in the horizontal (unit) direction to be displayed on one screen.

[1250] FIG. 100 is a sub-function obtained by subdividing the screen operation function NR3 and its flowchart number (see FIG. 11).
4 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing 4), and the screen operations described in FIG. (1) Scroll up ... Moves the cell display area upward. (2) Scroll down ... Moves the cell display area downward. (3) Scroll left ... Moves the cell display area to the left. (4) Scroll right ... Moves the cell display area to the right. (5) Home set: The cell display area is moved to the first unit of the first scene. (6) Scroll unit setting: Set one scene or one unit or half screen. (7) Redisplay ... Redisplay the cell display area of one screen.

[1255] Fig. 101 is a blinking unitized data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitized data file function NR4 and the numbers of their flowcharts (Figs. 165 and 166). The blinking unitized data file function reads the data stored in the auxiliary storage device and writes it in the main storage device.

[1256] The blinking unitized data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device.

[1260] FIG. 102 is a subordinate function obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data editing function NR5 for editing the blinking time-series data and its flowchart numbers (FIGS. 121 and 12).
2) Flashing time-series data editing function hierarchy diagram (1/2)
The flashing time-series data editing work shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Color selection: Set the lighting color or turn off the light. (2) Erase all (clear) ... Turns off all scenes of all units. (3) Lighting setting and extinguishing setting ... In the blinking time-series data cell area, if the cell of the corresponding unit and the corresponding scene is designated, the lighting setting and the extinguishing setting alternate, and at the time of lighting, with the selected color. indicate. (4) Light-off setting ... Select [Black] in the color selection and indicate the relevant cell to turn it off. (5) Background pattern selection ... Select the background blinking change state. (6) Background pattern setting ... Sets the background blinking change state. (7) Line editing ... Sets the blinking state to a line shape all at once. (8) Rectangle edit ... The blinking state is collectively set to a rectangle. (9) Triangular edit ... Sets the blinking status to a triangular shape all at once. (10) Scene duplication ... Copies the scene with the cursor. (11) Delete single scene ... Delete one scene with cursor. (12) Unit duplication ... Copy the unit with the cursor. (13) Delete single unit ... Delete one unit with cursor.

[1270] FIG. 103 is a subordinate function obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data editing function NR5 for editing the blinking time-series data and its flowchart numbers (FIGS. 121 and 143).
And FIG. 154) is a hierarchy diagram (2/2) of the blinking time series data editing function, and the blinking time series data editing work described in the figure is shown below. (1) Scene selection ... One or more target scenes to be inserted, copied, deleted or moved are selected. (2) Insert scene ... Between one scene and the next,
Insert the preselected scene (s). (3) Scene copy ... Between one scene and the next,
Copy the preselected scene (s). (4) Delete scene ... Deletes a preselected scene (s) between one scene and the next. (5) Scene movement ... Between one scene and the next,
Move the preselected scene (s). (6) Unit selection ... Select one or more units to be inserted, copied, deleted, or moved. (7) Inserting a unit ... Insert a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next unit. (8) Unit copy: Copy a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next unit. (9) Delete unit ... Delete a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next unit. (10) Move unit: Move a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next.

FIG. 104 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data file function NR7 and the numbers of their flowcharts (FIGS. 165 and 167). The blinking time-series data file function reads the data stored in the main storage device and writes and stores it in the auxiliary storage device, or reads the data stored in the auxiliary storage device and writes and stores it in the storage device. .

[1282] The blinking time series data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Select the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Select the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device. (7) Writing ... Writing and saving data in the auxiliary storage device (with overwrite confirmation).

[1290] FIG. 105 is a blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6 and a blinking time series transmission data file function NR8.
FIG. 4 is a hierarchical view of a blinking time-series transmission data editing / file function showing a subordinate function that has been subdivided. The blinking time-series transmission data editing function generates blinking time-series transmission data from the blinking time-series data of the main storage device, and the blinking time-series transmission data file function transmits and reads / writes the blinking time-series transmission data.

[1292] The blinking time-series transmission data editing / file work shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Blinking time series transmission data editing: Blinking time series transmission data is generated from the blinking time series data in the main storage device. (2) Start transmission of blinking time-series transmission data ... When the communication function operates with two computers, the blinking time-series transmission data is transmitted as it is. If the communication function does not operate with one computer, the blinking time-series transmission data displayed on the file operation screen is saved in the specified file. (3) End of transmission of blinking time-series transmission data ... Transmission of blinking time-series transmission data is stopped. (4) Temporary stop point setting ... Flashing Designates a scene in which the transmission of time-series transmission data is to be temporarily stopped. (5) Resume after pausing ... Waiting for input from the keyboard or coordinate input device to resume transmission. (6) Writing ... Writing and saving data in the auxiliary storage device.

[1300] FIG. 106 is a communication function hierarchy diagram showing the communication function NR9 for transmitting blinking time-series transmission data and the flowchart numbers (FIGS. 172 and 173).

[1310] FIG. 107 is a printing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the printing function NR10 for printing blinking time-series data and the numbers (FIGS. 175, 177 and 178) of the flowchart thereof. The printing work described in 1. is shown below. (1) Specifying the horizontal start page: When blinking time series data, specify the horizontal page number to start printing. (2) Horizontal end page designation: When blinking time-series data is printed, the horizontal page number to end printing is designated. (3) Vertical start page designation: When blinking time-series data is printed, specify the vertical page number to start printing. (4) Vertical end page designation: When blinking time-series data is printed, the vertical page number to end printing is designated. (5) Specify horizontal page size ... When printing blinking time series data,
Specify the number of units per page to print in the horizontal direction. (6) Vertical page size designation ... When blinking time series data is printed,
Specify the number of scenes per page to print in the vertical direction. (7) Output content selection ... System information or blinking time series data is selected. (8) Output destination selection ... Printer printing or file output is selected. (9) Device setting: Set the device type and the like. (10) Printing work: Print on a printer or output to a file. (11) Range Rectangle Designation: Specify the print range as a rectangle on the screen.

FIG. 108 is a hard copy function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the hard copy function NR11 and the numbers (FIG. 176) in the flowchart thereof. The subordinate functions of the hard copy shown in the figure are shown below.
The hard copy function makes a hard copy of the image data of the editing screen displayed on the screen. (1) Color / monochrome selection: Select color or monochrome. (2) Density setting ... Set the number of dots per inch. (3) Hard copy device setting: Set the device type and the like. (4) Gradation inversion setting ... Set whether to invert the gradation. (5) Hard copy work

[Explanation of FIG. 109] FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the entire function of the NRGS processing step of the present invention, and shows whether the initial setting step and the initial environment reading step (FIG. 110) and one computer or two computers. After performing the determination step, the EOJ (end of job) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, and the function category input, the function category selection and EOJ shown below are performed.
The steps of the loop consisting of the respective operations of turning on the flag (end of selection of function category) are ended.

The above-mentioned initial setting step is the setting of default values such as cell display size, and the step of determining whether one computer or two computers is used when the two computers operate the communication function described later. , Initialize the communication function, turn off the EOJ (End of Job) flag,
When the loop step is started and one computer does not operate the communication function, the EOJ (End of Job) flag is turned off and the loop step is started.

[1336] The above functional divisions and procedures are as follows. (1) Setting function NR2 (FIG. 111) (2) Screen operation function NR3 (FIG. 114) (3) File function A. Blinking unitized data file function NR4 (FIGS. 165 and 166) B. Blinking time series data file function NR7 (FIGS. 165 and 167) C.I. Blinking time series transmission data file function NR8 (Fig. 16
5) (4) Blinking time series data editing function NR5 (FIG. 121) (5) Blinking time series data transmission function (FIGS. 172 and 17)
3) A. Blinking time series transmission data file function NR8 B. Communication function NR9 (6) Printing function NR10 (Figs. 175, 177 and 1
78) (7) Hard copy function NR11 (Fig. 176)

[1339] After selecting the above function category and performing the work of the selected first function category, the next function category is selected and the work of the selected second function category is performed. When the EOP flag ON (division selection end) work is repeated, the functional division work ends.

[1350] [Explanation of FIG. 110] FIG.
It is a flowchart of the initial environment reading of the processing step, in which the environment data file open and the EOF (End of File) flag are turned off and the loop is started. Start loop, read character string for 1 line, 1
The character string for the line is decomposed, and the first setting character string (keyword) of the decomposed character string branches to the following setting operation. When the determination of the first character string of the decomposed character string for one line is repeated in sequence to determine the end of the decomposed character string of one line of all lines, the EOF flag is turned on, and the loop And close the environment data file.

[1351] In the branching setting operation, the first character string of the decomposed character string for one line is determined, the character string having the same name is set, and then the next decomposed character string for one line is set. The first character string is determined, the character strings having the same name are set, the end of the first character string of the decomposed character string for one line is determined, and the operation is repeated until the flag is turned on.

[1351] To determine the decomposed first character string, set the drive and path name of the NRGS message data file,
This includes work such as setting the drive and path name of the NRGS image data file, setting the drive and path name of the work file, and setting the color component corresponding to the palette number (nn) setting.

[1360] [Explanation of FIG. 111] FIG.
It is a flowchart of the whole setting function of a processing step, an EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the step of a loop is started, work division input, work division selection, and the following work are implemented.

[1361] The setting work categories are display cell number setting, cycle setting, unit number setting, maximum scene number setting, blinking display start scene number setting, blinking display end scene number setting, and EO.
This is each work in which the P flag is turned on (end of work category selection).
After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the setting work ends.

[1370] [Description of FIG. 112] FIG. 112 shows a work procedure of blinking time-series data and blinking time-series transmission data, and the work procedure and the numbers of the flowcharts are as follows. A. Blinking time-series data (1) Start-up ... NRGS start-up (Fig. 109) (2) Reading ... File operation selection, file name setting (selection or input) and reading work (Fig. 109) (3) Editing ... Color selection (Fig. 121) (4) Recording ... File operation selection, file name setting, writing work (FIG. 165) (5) Output ... Hard copy (FIG. 176) (6) Printing ... Printing (FIG. 175, FIG. 177 and FIG. 178) B. Blinking time-series transmission data (1) Setting ... Cycle, start scene, end scene and pause scene setting (FIG. 111) (2) Editing (FIG. 166) (3) Recording ... File operation selection, file name setting, writing operation ( 165) (4) Output ... Transmission (FIG. 172 or FIG. 173)

[1380] [Explanation of FIG. 113] FIG. 113 shows NRGS.
It is the screen operation procedure chart NR3 of the processing step, and at the time of editing the blinking time-series data or editing the blinking time-series transmission data, the blinking time-series data B11 of the main storage device is scrolled, zoomed, re-displayed by a screen display command or a screen display operation. Display etc.

[1382] [Explanation of FIG. 114] FIG.
It is a flowchart of the screen operation procedure of the processing step,
When the blinking time-series data is edited or the blinking time-series transmission data is edited, the blinking time-series data B11 of the main storage device is scrolled by the screen display command or the screen display operation (home,
Right, upper right, upper, upper left, left, lower left, lower and lower right), zoom (enlarge and reduce), screen redisplay, etc. In this screen operation procedure, the work is completed each time, so the work classification is selected every time.

[1400] 3.1 Method of Generating Blinking Time Series Data The method of generating blinking time series data of the present invention graphically shows the time series change of the foreground color and blinking and the time series change of the background color and blinking. This is a method of generating the converted data. The blinking time-series data that graphically represents the temporal change of the blinking is generated from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data by using the blinking time-series data editing function.

[1402] The method of generating the blinking time series data B11 is as follows. (1) As described in the embodiment 1 or the embodiment 2 or the embodiment 5 or the embodiment 7 or the embodiment 8 shown in FIG. 15 described above, the blinking unitized data B07 is interactively input to the computer and generated. To do. (2) As described in Embodiment 3 or Embodiment 4 or Embodiment 6 or Embodiment 9 or Embodiment 10 shown in FIG. 15 described above, from the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 generated in the NCAD processing step to the computer To automatically convert and generate.

In the method (2) of generating blinking time-series data B11, the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is stored in the blinking unit coordinate graphic data storage device C07 by using the file function as shown in FIG. It is read from and generated using the blinking time series data editing function NR5. When the file name of the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 is designated, the number of units and the maximum scene are automatically set.

[1410] Referring to FIGS. 115 to 119,
A description will be given of a generation and editing procedure explanatory diagram of blinking time series data.

[Explanation of FIG. 115] FIG. 115 is a flowchart for explaining initialization of blinking time-series data. The blinking unit coordinate graphic data storage device C07 causes the blinking unit coordinate graphic data to be blinked by the blinking unitized data file function NR4. B08 is read, and the read blinking unit coordinate figure data B08
Only the blinking unitized data B07 is written in the main storage device from among the above, and all the units and all the scenes of the blinking time-series data in the main storage device are set to the off state.

[Explanation of FIG. 116] FIG. 116A is an explanatory diagram of an initial state of blinking time series data, and FIG.
By initializing the blinking time-series data of, all the units and all the scenes are set to the initial state of "black" in the off state.

FIG. 116B is a memory explanatory diagram of the main storage device in the initial state of blinking time-series data, in which all units and all scenes are turned off by initialization of the blinking time-series data. Is set to the initial state.

[Explanation of FIG. 117] FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram of a generation procedure of blinking time series data, in which the blinking time series data B11 generated or edited in the past is read from the blinking time series data storage device C09, The flashing time series data file function NR7 writes the read flashing time series data to the main storage device, and the flashing time series data of the main storage device is edited by the flashing time series data editing function NR7 described later to create the flashing time series data. The data B11 is generated or edited.

[Explanation of FIG. 118] FIG. 118 (A) is an explanatory diagram of a process of generating blinking time-series data of the embodiment.
FIG. 19B is a memory explanatory diagram of the main storage device in the process of generating blinking time series data, and is set to the following state by the procedure of generating or editing the blinking time series data of FIG. 117.

[1460] Each unit name ABCDE in FIG. 118 (A)
And the above-mentioned respective characters [ABCDE] of the coordinate figure of FIG. 2 will be explained. Unit No. 1 of FIG. 118 (A)
5 to 5 respectively correspond to the unit name ABCDE.
Further, scenes 1 to 12 in FIG. 118 (A) correspond to white characters or black characters in each character [ABCDE] of the coordinate figures in scenes 1 (t1) to 12 (t12) in FIG. 2, respectively. In each scene of FIG. 118A, when it is described as black, it is in an off state, and when it is described as red, it is in a red lighting state. On the other hand, each character [AB
The white letters in [CDE] indicate the off state, and the black letters indicate the on state.

[1462] In scene 1 of FIG. 118 (A), all of the unit names ABCDE are black, indicating the off state,
On the other hand, in the scene 1 (t1) of FIG. 2, each character [ABCD
E] is a blank character and indicates the off state, and both correspond.

Next, in scene 2 of FIG. 118 (A), only the unit name A is red and indicates a lighting state of red, while in scene 1 (t1) of FIG. 2, only the character [A] is displayed. The lighting state of black-painted characters is shown, and both correspond.
The same applies hereinafter.

[Description of FIG. 119] FIG. 119 is a memory explanatory diagram of the memory when the blinking time-series data B11 is stored in the auxiliary storage device, and is the memory of the main storage device of FIG. 116 (B) described above. It is consistent with the recorded figure of.

[Effect of method of generating blinking time series data] The effects of the "method of generating blinking time series data" of the present invention are as follows. (1) The blinking unitized data B07 can be input in an interactive form with a computer, and the blinking time series data B11 can be efficiently and easily generated without the need for an image material. (2) The blinking state of the generated blinking time series data B11 is
It is possible to check efficiently and easily by the screen display of the computer without the need for an art material. (3) The generated blinking time series data B11 is printed by the printing function N.
By printing using R10, it is possible to easily visually confirm the blinking state. (4) The generated blinking time-series data B11 is edited into the blinking time-series transmission data B12 by the blinking time-series transmission data editing function NR6, and further, efficiently by the blinking time-series transmission data file function NR8 or the communication function NR9. And it can be easily transmitted.

3.2 Method for Editing Blinking Time Series Data The method for editing blinking time series data according to the present invention uses the blinking time series data generated by the method for generating blinking time series data in Section 3.1 as a computer Edit (modify) interactively.

[1502] "Method for editing blinking time series data" of the present invention
In order to simplify the generation or editing of the blinking time series data, (1) a function of editing a time series change of the foreground blinking pattern and color, and (2) a time series of the background blinking pattern and color. It has the function of editing dynamic changes.

[1520] Referring to FIGS. 120 and 121,
An operation procedure explanatory diagram and a flowchart of the blinking time series data editing function will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 120] FIG. 120 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of a file of blinking unitized data and editing of blinking time series data, which is a blinking unitized data file function N
Using R4, the blinking unitized data B07 or the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is selected from the blinking unitized data B07.
Only the flashing unitized data or the flashing unit coordinate graphic data storage device C07 is read and written in the main storage device, and is edited by the flashing time series data editing function NR5 to generate the flashing time series data B11. Further, the generated blinking time series data B08 is read from the main storage device and written and stored in the blinking time series data storage device C09.

[1532] The blinking time-series data B11 generated by the "method of generating blinking time-series data" is read from the blinking time-series data storage device C09, written into the main storage device, and edited by the blinking time-series data editing function NR5.

[Description of FIG. 121] FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the entire blinking time-series data editing function. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, loop start, work division input, work division selection. , The following work divisions, loop end steps, etc. The editing work categories are color selection, screen operation functions (scrolling, zooming, etc.), cell-by-cell blink editing, cell linear blinking editing (hereinafter referred to as linear editing), cell rectangular blinking editing (hereinafter referred to as rectangle editing), Triangular blink editing of cells (hereinafter referred to as triangle editing), blinking editing per scene (hereinafter referred to as scene editing), blinking editing per unit (hereinafter referred to as unit editing), pause point setting ON / OFF, chip allocation and This is each work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end). After selecting the work category above and setting the selected first work category, select the next work category,
When the work for setting the selected second work category is repeated and the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected in succession, the blinking time-series data editing work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 122] FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the blinking editing procedure of the blinking time-series data editing function, and the blinking editing procedure is as follows, as shown in FIGS. It is as follows. (A) Blinking editing procedure in cell units Designate a cell to be edited. Determine the current color of the cell. When it is black, it changes to the lighting color selected and specified.
For other colors, change it to off (black). (B) Linear blinking editing procedure of cells (diagonal blinking setting, FIG. 123 to FIG. 134) A start point is designated. Specify the end point. Specify the width indication point. Set the specified area. (C) Blinking editing procedure of cell rectangle (FIGS. 135 to 13)
8) Specify one vertex. Specify the diagonal point. Set the specified area. (D) Cell triangle blinking editing procedure (FIGS. 139 to 14)
2) Specify the starting point. Specify the end point. Specify the width indication point. Set the specified area. (E) Blinking editing procedure for each scene A target scene is designated. Set all cells in the specified scene to blink in the specified color. (F) Blinking editing procedure for each unit Specify the target unit. Set all cells in the specified unit to blink in the specified color.

[1560] [Explanation of FIGS. 123 to 142] FIG.
142 to 142 are explanatory diagrams of linear editing, rectangular editing, and triangular editing. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the upper left direction and the lower right direction are designated when the diagonal blinking of the single unit is set. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the lower right direction is designated to the upper left direction when the diagonal blinking of the single unit is set. 12
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which a single unit is set to be obliquely blinking and the direction from upper right to lower left is designated. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the direction from the lower left to the upper right is designated when the diagonal blinking of the single unit is set.

[1568] FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the upper left to the lower right (1
/ 2). FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the left direction, and the blinking direction in the diagonal blinking setting is designated from the upper left to the lower right.

[1572] FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when oblique blinking is set is designated from the lower right to the upper left (1
/ 2). FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the left direction, and the blinking direction in the diagonal blinking setting is designated from the lower right to the upper left.

[1576] FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the upper right to the lower left (1
/ 2). FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the left direction, and the blinking direction in the diagonal blinking setting is designated from the upper right to the lower left.

[1580] FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the lower left to the upper right.
/ 2). FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of linear editing in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the left direction, and the blinking direction in the diagonal blinking setting is designated from the lower left to the upper right.

[1584] FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in which the blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from upper left to lower right. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in which the blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from lower left to upper right. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in which the blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from lower right to upper left. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in which the blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from upper right to lower left.

[1596] Fig. 139 is an explanatory diagram of triangular editing in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the right direction and the blinking direction is designated in the upper right direction from the reference point. FIG. 140
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a triangle edit in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the left and the blinking direction is designated to the upper left from the reference point. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram of triangle editing in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction and the blinking direction is designated to the lower left from the reference point. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram of triangle editing in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated in the right direction, and the blinking direction is designated from the reference point to the lower right.

[1610] Referring to FIGS. 143 to 153,
A flowchart of scene editing of blinking time series data and an explanatory diagram of scene editing will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 143] FIG. 143 is a flowchart of scene editing of the blinking time-series data editing function, which is composed of steps such as work classification input, work classification selection, and work classification described below. The editing work classification includes color setting of all units of a designated scene, scene duplication, designation of a starting point of an editing target, designation of an ending point of an editing target, scene insertion, scene deletion, scene copying, scene movement, and the like. In this screen operation procedure, the work is completed each time, so the work classification is selected every time.

[1620] [Explanation of FIGS. 144 to 153] FIG.
153 to 153 are explanatory diagrams of scene editing. FIG. 144
[Fig. 7] is an explanatory diagram of selection of a scene to be edited. The selection of the edit target scene is performed by designating the start point of the edit target and the end point of the edit target in the scene editing work section of FIG. 143.

[1630] Fig. 145 is an explanatory diagram of inserting one scene. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of inserting a plurality of scenes. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram of inserting multiple scenes (2/2)
Is. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram of deleting one scene. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of scene copying. Figure 1
Reference numeral 50 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of scene copying. Figure 15
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of scene movement.

[1644] Fig. 152 is an explanatory diagram of all-unit setting for one scene. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram of scene duplication.

[1650] Referring to FIGS. 154 to 164,
A flowchart of unit editing of blinking time series data and an explanatory diagram of unit editing will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 154] FIG. 154 is a flowchart of unit editing of the blinking time-series data editing function, which is composed of steps such as work classification input, work classification selection, and work classification described below. The editing work classification includes color setting of all scenes of designated 1 unit, duplication of unit, designation of start point of editing target, designation of end point of editing target, unit insertion, unit deletion, unit copying, unit movement, and the like. In this screen operation procedure, the work is completed each time, so the work classification is selected every time.

[1670] [Explanation of FIGS. 155 to 164] FIG.
164 to 164 are explanatory diagrams of unit editing. Figure 15
5 is an explanatory diagram of selecting an edit target unit. The unit to be edited is selected by designating the starting point of the editing target and the ending point of the editing target of the unit editing work section in FIG. 143.

[1672] FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram of inserting one unit. FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram of inserting a plurality of units (1/2)
Is. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram of inserting a plurality of units (2 /
2). FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram of unit deletion. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of unit copying. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of unit copying.

[1682] FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram of unit movement. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of setting all scenes in one unit. FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram of duplication of units.

[1690] [Effect of editing method of blinking time-series data] The effects of the editing method of blinking time-series data are as follows. The generated blinking time-series data B11 can be efficiently and easily edited without the need of an art material by the interactive form with the computer.

[1700] 3.3 Method for recording and outputting blinking time-series data The method for recording blinking time-series data according to the present invention shows the number of scenes, the number of units, the blinking state of a unit for each scene, etc. in an interactive form with a computer. Specify and record electronically.

[1712] Referring to FIGS. 165 to 167,
A flowchart of the operation procedure of the file function will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 165] FIG. 165 is a flowchart of the entire file function at the time of editing the blinking time-series data of the present invention. The EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, and the loop step is started. , Input work category, select work category and perform the following work. The work classifications are list display switching, drive setting, path name setting, file name setting, blinking unitized data reading, blinking time-series data reading, blinking unitized data writing, blinking time-series data writing, blinking These are operations of writing time-series transmission data and turning on the EOP flag (end of selection of work category). After selecting the above work category and performing the setting work for the selected first work category, select the next work category and perform the setting work for the selected second work category, and so on. When the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the setting work ends.

[1730] [Explanation of FIG. 166] FIG. 166 shows NRGS.
It is a flowchart of the reading procedure of the blinking unitized data of a processing step.

The reading procedure of the blinking unitized data file function NR4 in the flowchart of FIG. 166 is as follows: open the blinking unitized data file, read the maximum number of units, and read the maximum number of scenes; The number is determined, the unit number is read, the foreground / background (front / back) classification is read, and the unit name is read in sequence, and when the maximum number of units is reached, the reading work is terminated, the loop is terminated, and blinking is performed. Close the data file.

[1740] [Explanation of FIG. 167] FIG. 167 (A) is a flowchart of a procedure for reading blinking time-series data, and FIG. 167 (B) is a flowchart of a procedure for writing blinking time-series data.

[1742] The reading procedure of the blinking time-series data file function NR7 in the flowchart of FIG. 167 (A) is as follows.
Sequentially read the blinking state of each scene and unit,
Loop 2 ends. Then, the step of loop 3 is started to determine the presence / absence of the background. When the background is present, the blinking type for each scene and unit is sequentially read, loop 3 and loop 1 are terminated, and when blinking Close the series data file.

The writing procedure of the blinking time-series data file function NR7 in the flowchart of FIG. 167 (B) is as follows. When the blinking time-series data file is opened, the number of scenes is discriminated and then the steps of loop 1 and loop 2 are started.
Write the blinking state for each scene and unit sequentially,
Loop 2 ends. Then, the step of loop 3 is started to determine the presence / absence of the background. When the background is present, the blinking type for each scene and unit is sequentially written, and loop 3 and loop 1 are terminated to blink. Close the time series data file.

[1750] Referring to FIGS. 120 and 168,
Flashing unitized data file NR of NRGS processing step
4 and the operation procedure explanatory diagram of the blinking time series data file NR7 will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 168] FIG. 168 corresponds to FIG.
FIG. 8 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of reading and editing (or re-editing) the blinking time series data B11 generated (or edited) and stored by the procedure of FIG. In the same figure, the blinking time series data B11 generated (or edited) and stored by the procedure of FIG.
Is read from the blinking time series data storage device C09 and written in the main storage device. The blinking time-series data written in this main memory is used as the blinking time-series data editing function N.
The blinking time series data B11 of the main storage device edited by R5 and edited (or re-edited) is stored in the blinking time series data storage device C09 by using the blinking time series data file function NR7.

[1770] Referring to FIGS. 169 to 173,
An operation procedure explanatory diagram and a flowchart of the blinking time series transmission data editing function, the blinking time series transmission data file function, and the communication function will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 169] FIG. 169 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of the blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6 and the blinking time series transmission data file function NR8. In the figure, the blinking time series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168 is read from the blinking time series data storage device C09 and written in the main storage device,
Blinking time series transmission data B12 is generated by the blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6. The generated blinking time series transmission data B12 of the main storage device is stored in the blinking time series transmission data storage device C14 by the blinking time series transmission data file function NR8.

[1774] Blinking time-series transmission data storage device C1 in FIG.
The blinking time series transmission data B12 stored in No. 4 is stored in the blinking time series transmission data storage device C14 by the blinking time series transmission data file function NR8 when the first communication means is not provided. Transmission data B12
Is read and used in the NDSP operation step described later.

[Explanation of FIG. 170] FIG. 170 is an explanatory view of the operation procedure of the first communication means C21. In the figure,
Blinking time series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168 and stored by the procedure of FIG. The blinking time series transmission data B12 is generated by the data editing function NR6. Blinking time-series transmission data B1 of the main storage device generated in the NRGS processing step of the first computer
2, the first communication means C21 (the communication function NR9 of NRGS processed by the first computer and the communication function ND4 of the NDSP processing step processed by the second computer).
To the main memory of the NDSP processing step.

[Explanation of FIG. 171] FIG. 171 is an explanatory view of an operation procedure when there is one computer and no communication means is used. In the figure, the blinking time-series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168 and stored by the procedure of FIG. 169 is read from the blinking time-series data storage device C09 and written to the main storage device. The blinking time series transmission data B12 is generated by the blinking time series transmission data editing function NR6. This blinking time-series transmission data B12 is blinking time-series transmission data file function N
It is stored in the blinking time series transmission data storage device C14 by R8. This stored blinking time series transmission data is
Flashing time series transmission data file function of DSP operation step ND3 is used by reading.

[Description of FIG. 172] FIG. 172 is a flowchart of the first example of the transmission procedure of blinking time-series transmission data, and the transmission procedure is as follows. (1) Determine whether there is one computer (hereinafter referred to as communication function OFF) or two computers (hereinafter referred to as communication function ON). If the communication function is OFF, open the blinking time series transmission data file. , Start the steps of the loop of the number of repetitions of all scenes (hereinafter, referred to as a cycle of the loop) and the loop from the start scene to the end scene (hereinafter, referred to as a scene loop), and when the communication function is ON, Begin the steps of loops and loops of a scene. (2) The number of repetitions of the cycle loop is counted, and the following scene loop is repeated until the number of repetitions of the cycle reaches a predetermined value. (3) In the scene loop, it is determined whether or not the transmission is in the middle, and when the transmission is not in the middle, the blinking time-series data is edited, and the communication function ON / OFF is determined again,
When the communication function is OFF, the blinking time-series transmission data is written to the blinking time-series data storage device C14, and it is determined to be paused. When the communication function is ON, the blinking time-series transmission data is transmitted from the main storage device. Then, the suspension is determined. (4) If there is no pause, the step of the loop of the next scene is started, and if there is a pause, wait for a restart instruction and wait for a restart instruction to start the next scene. Start the steps of the loop. (5) When the steps (2) to (3) are repeated to determine the end of the scene loop, the scene loop step of the next cycle loop is repeated. (6) When the number of repetitions of the cycle loop reaches a predetermined value, it is determined whether the communication function is ON or OFF, and the communication function is turned off.
When it is N, the procedure for transmitting the blinking time series data is ended, and when the communication function is OFF, the blinking time series data transmission file is closed and the procedure for transmitting the blinking time series transmission data is ended.

[Description of FIG. 173] FIG. 173 is a flowchart of the second example of the transmission procedure of blinking time-series transmission data, and the transmission procedure is as follows. It is determined whether there is one computer (hereinafter referred to as communication function OFF) or two computers (hereinafter referred to as communication function ON). A. When the communication function is OFF (1) Flashing Open the time series transmission data file.
Begin the steps of the cycle loop and the scene loop. (2) The loop 1 of the cycle is started, the number of repetitions of the cycle of the cycle is counted, and the loop of the following scene is repeated until the number of repetitions of the cycle of the cycle reaches a predetermined value. (3) The loop 2 of the scene is started and it is judged whether the transmission is in progress. (4) When the transmission is not terminated halfway, the blinking time series data is edited and the blinking time series transmission data is written in the blinking time series data storage device C14. (5) When there is no pause, the step of the loop of the next scene is started. When there is a pause, when a restart instruction is waited for and a restart instruction is given, the next scene Begin a step in a loop. (6) When the end of the loop of the scene is determined by repeating the above steps (3) to (5), the steps of loop 2 of the cycle next to loop 1 are repeated. (7) When the number of loops 1 of all cycles and the loop 2 of all scenes are completed, the blinking time series data transmission file is closed and the transmission procedure of the blinking time series transmission data is completed.

[1818] B. When the communication function is ON (1) Start the steps of the cycle loop and the scene loop. (2) The loop 3 of the cycle is started, the number of repetitions of the cycle of the cycle is counted, and the loop of the following scene is repeated until the number of repetitions of the cycle of the cycle reaches a predetermined value. (3) The loop 4 of the scene is started and it is determined whether the transmission is in progress. (4) When the transmission is not terminated halfway, the blinking time series data is edited and the blinking time series transmission data is transmitted from the main storage device. (5) When there is no pause, the step of the loop of the next scene is started. When there is a pause, when a restart instruction is waited for and a restart instruction is given, the next scene Begin a step in a loop. (6) When the steps (2) to (5) are repeated to determine the end of the loop of the scene, the steps of the loop 4 of the scene having the next cycle of the loop 3 are repeated. (7) Loop 4 for all scenes in loop 3 for all cycles
Is completed, the loop 2 of the scene and the loop 1 of the cycle are ended, and the transmission procedure of the blinking time-series transmission data is ended.

[Effect of recording and output method of blinking time-series data] The effects of "recording and output method of blinking time-series data" of the present invention are as follows. The generated or edited blinking time-series data B11 can be easily electronically recorded, and can be easily reproduced and corrected without the need for an additional drawing material.

[2000] 3.4 Method of printing blinking time series data and hard copy method The method of printing the blinking time series data B11 and the blinking time series transmission data B12 of the present invention is the number of scenes, the number of units, and the blinking state of the unit for each scene. Or the like is designated by an interactive form with the computer and printed on the printing device C17, or stored in the auxiliary storage device in the printing form. Below, FIG.
4 to 178, an operation procedure explanatory diagram and a flow chart of the blinking time-series data printing function NR10 will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 174] FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram of the operation procedure of the blinking time series data B11. The same figure is shown in FIG.
20 or the blinking time series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 168 using the printing function NR10.
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure for printing by the printing device C17 or storing it in a print format in an auxiliary storage device.

In the figure, the printing function NR10 is as follows. (1) The blinking time series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168 is read from the blinking time series data storage device C09, written into the main storage device, and edited by the blinking time series data editing function NR5, Blinking time series data B11 is printed. (2) Again, the edited flashing time series data B11 of the main storage device is printed in a flashing time series data storage device C09.
Remember.

[Explanation of FIG. 175] FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the printing function NR10 for printing the blinking time-series data B11, in which the EOP (end of procedure) flag is turned off, the loop step is started, and the work classification is started. Input, select work category and perform the following work. For work classification, print condition setting (Fig. 177) and screen designation of print range (Fig. 18)
2), output destination designation (printer or file), printing work (FIG. 178), and turning on of the EOP flag (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the work of the selected first work category, the next work category is selected and the work of the selected second work category is repeated in sequence, and EOP is repeated. When the work for which the flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the printing work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 176] FIG. 176 shows a hard copy function NR1 for recording the edit screen image data B10d.
It is a flowchart of No. 1, EOP (end of procedure)
The flag is turned off, the step of the loop is started, work category input, work category selection and the following work are executed. The work categories are color / monochrome selection, density setting,
These operations are hard copy device setting, hard copy, and EOP flag ON (work category selection end). After selecting the above work category and performing the work of the selected first work category, the next work category is selected and the work of the selected second work category is performed. When the work for which the flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected, the hard copy work ends.

[Explanation of FIG. 177] FIG. 177 is a flow chart of a print setting procedure of the print function NR10 for printing the blinking time series data B11. Input, select work category and perform the following work. The work categories are: number of scenes per page and recalculation of related conditions, number of units per page and recalculation of related conditions, start scene and related condition recalculation, end scene and related condition recalculation, start page and related condition recalculation,
These are the end page, recalculation of related conditions, and turning on the EOP flag (end of work category selection). After selecting the work category above and setting the selected first work category,
When the next work category is selected and the selected second work category is set, and then the work for which the EOP flag is turned on (work category selection end) is selected in sequence, the printing operation is completed. In the recalculation of the related conditions, the related conditions are automatically calculated according to the set value of the work selected immediately before.

[Explanation of FIG. 178] FIG. 178 is a flowchart of the printing operation procedure of the blinking time series data B11, and the printing operation procedure is as follows. (1) The start page number in the scene direction and the start page number in the unit direction are calculated, and the print file is opened. (2) Loop 1 (page number in the scene direction) and Loop 2
(Page number in unit direction) is started, and the heading of the starting page in the unit direction (first page) is printed at the starting page in the scene direction. (3) Start page in the scene direction, start page in the unit direction (first page), start printing in-page scene number, finish printing in page scene number, start printing in page unit number and print in page Calculate the ending unit number. (4) The loop 3 (in-page scene) and the loop 4 (in-page unit) are started, and the cell information of the starting page (first page) in the unit direction is sequentially printed at the starting page in the scene direction. (5) After printing the cell information of the start page (first page) in the unit direction at the start page in the scene direction, the process returns to loop 2 and the second page (second page) in the unit direction is started at the start page in the scene direction. The above (3) and (4) are repeated.

(6) After sequentially printing the cell information of the second page (second page) in the unit direction on the start page in the scene direction,
Returning to loop 2, the above (3) and (4) are repeated from the start page in the scene direction to the third page in the unit direction (third page) to the last page in the unit direction. (7) When printing is completed up to the last page of loop 2, the second page in the scene direction of loop 1 and the loop 2 (page number in the unit direction) are started, and the second page in the scene direction becomes the start page in the unit direction. Print headings. (8) Calculation of the in-page print start scene number of the start page in the unit direction in the second page of the scene direction, calculation of the in-page print end scene number, calculation of the in-page print start unit number, and in-page print end unit number Make a calculation. (9) Loop 3 (in-page scene) and loop 4 (in-page unit) are started, and the cell information of the second page in the scene direction and the start page in the unit direction) is sequentially printed. (10) After the cell information of the start page in the unit direction is printed on the second page in the scene direction, the process returns to loop 2 and the above (7) to (9) of the second page in the unit direction in the second page in the scene direction. )repeat.

(11) After sequentially printing the cell information of the second page (second page) in the unit direction on the second page in the scene direction,
Returning to the loop 2, the above (7) and (10) are repeated from the second page in the scene direction to the third page in the unit direction to the last page in the unit direction. (12) When printing is completed up to the last page of loop 2, the above steps (7) to (11) are repeated from the third page in the scene direction of loop 1 to the last page. (13) When printing is completed from the third page to the final page in the scene direction of loop 1, the print file is closed and all printing is completed.

[2040] Referring to FIGS. 179 to 187,
An example of printing blinking time series data will be described.

[2042] [Description of FIG. 179 and FIG. 180] FIG.
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of a printing method for printing by directly designating a printing range of blinking time series data on a screen. Figure 1
Reference numeral 80 is an explanatory view (2/2) of a printing method for printing by directly designating the printing range of the blinking time series data on the screen.

[Explanation of FIG. 181] FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram of a printing procedure of the edited blinking time series data. In the figure, the blinking time series data B11 stored in the blinking time series data storage device C09 is read, written in the main memory by the blinking time series data file function, and edited by the blinking time series data editing function NR5, Printing function N
Printing is performed by the printing device C17 using R10.
Further, the edited blinking time series data B11 is stored again in the blinking time series data storage device C09.

[Explanation of FIGS. 182 to 187] FIG. 182
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing items for which printing can be designated when printing is performed by the printing method of FIG. 175. Items that can be designated for printing include a horizontal start page, a vertical start page, a horizontal end page, a vertical end page, a horizontal page size, a vertical page size, an output content, an output destination, and direct designation (designated on the screen).

[2058] FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a printing example of blinking time-series data capable of printing the blinking time-series data generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168 on one A4 sheet. Scenes 1 to 12 are shown in the vertical direction, and blinking states of units 1 to 5 (4 is red) are shown in the horizontal direction.

[2060] FIGS. 184 to 187 show blinking time-series data of a size that cannot be printed on one A4 sheet generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or 168.
It is a figure which shows the 1st page thru | or the 4th page of the printing example divided and printed on a sheet.

[2062] FIG. 184 shows that the blinking time-series data B11 generated or edited by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG.
Page 1 of the printing example in which the blinking time-series data B11 is divided into four A4 sheets and printed when the size cannot be printed on one A4 sheet (scenes 1 to 30 in the vertical direction and units 1 to 30 in the horizontal direction) It is a figure showing the blinking state of 6). FIG. 185
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a second page (scenes 31 to 60 in the vertical direction and blinking states of units 1 to 6 in the horizontal direction) of the printing example of FIG. 184. FIG. 186 shows the third page of the print example of FIG. 184 (scenes 1 to 30 in the vertical direction and units 7 to 12 in the horizontal direction).
FIG. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing the fourth page (scenes 31 to 60 in the vertical direction and blinking states of the units 7 to 12 in the horizontal direction) of the printing example of FIG. 184.

[Explanation of FIG. 188] FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining a hard copy procedure for making a hard copy of the image data of the edit screen displayed on the screen. The hard copy procedure shown in FIG. 188 is shown below.

In the same figure, the blinking time series data B11 stored in the blinking time series data storage device C09 is written in the main storage device by the procedure of FIG. 120 or FIG. 168. The written blinking time-series data B11 is read and displayed on the screen. The image data B10d of the edit screen displayed on this screen is hard copied by the hard copy device C19 by the hard copy function NR11.

[Explanation of FIG. 189] FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining blinking time-series transmission data B12. In the figure, 1 to 19 in the first column (first column) on the left are scene numbers, F in the next column (second column) is the start code of the foreground data, and columns 3 to 11 are the foreground. Unit numbers from 1 to 9
Blinking state (0 is off, 1 or more is on color), 12th
E in the column is the end code of the foreground data, B in the 13th column is the start code of the background data, 14th to 20th columns are the blinking states of the background unit numbers 14 to 20 (0 is off, 1 or more is on. (Color), E in the 21st column, the end code of the background data, P in the 22nd column, the time series of the background (0 is stationary, 10 is a flow state from right to left, top to bottom, etc.) code, columns 23 to. The 29th column is the blinking state of the background time-series unit numbers 14 to 29 (0 is off, and 1 or more is on color) E in the 30th column is the end code of the background time-series data. First one on the left
P-1E of the scene number 20 in the column (first column) indicates the identification character string (end command) of the end of the blinking time-series transmission data B12. The code data of the above-mentioned English characters (F, E, B, P, etc.) is not added to the blinking time series transmission data of the main storage device, but is added by the blinking time series transmission data editing function.

[Effects of printing blinking time series data and hard copy method] The advantages of the "printing blinking time series data and hard copy method" of the present invention are as follows. (1) The time series change of the blinking time series data displayed by the blinking time series data B11 can be printed on the printing device (printer) C17 using the printing function NR10 and easily visually confirmed. it can. (2) In addition to printing directly on the printing device, it can be stored in the auxiliary storage device in a printing format and can be printed easily when necessary. (3) It is possible to specify printing styles such as printing paper of various sizes and partial printing. (4) The print range can be interactively specified on the screen. (5) The image data of the edit screen displayed on the screen
By making a hard copy using the hard copy function NR11, it can be easily confirmed visually.

[2100] 4. Method of Executing Simulation Display of Blinking Time-series Data The method of executing the simulation display of blinking time-series data is as follows. Is displayed on the screen of the second computer in real time, or (2) the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 for inputting the data output from the NCAD processing step using the auxiliary storage device without using the communication function is displayed. It is collectively processed and displayed on the screen of the same computer used for the NRGS processing step.

[2110] [Explanation of FIG. 190] FIG. 190 is an NG for generating the time-series graphic display program E05 shown in FIG.
It is a functional hierarchy diagram of the EN processing step, and each function is shown below.

[1] The communication function NG4 receives the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 of the main memory of the first computer, which is transmitted by the communication function NC8 of the NCAD processing step of the first computer, and then the second computer Write to main memory. The communication function NG4 and the communication function NC8 of the NCAD processing step form the second communication means C22. [2] The file function NG3 reads the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07 and writes it in the main storage device.

[3] The time-series graphic display sub-program generation function NG1 writes the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 written in the main memory through the second communication means C22 or directly.
From this, a source program of a time-series graphic display subprogram for displaying a simulation graphic is generated.

[3] [4] Translation / linkage editing function (time-series graphic display program generation function) NG2 calls (1) an off-the-shelf translation program (compiler) to generate (C language) time-series graphic display sub-program Function that translates the source program of the above to generate the object program of the time-series graphic display sub-program, and (2) Calls the ready-made linkage editing program (linkage editor) to control the ready-made hardware etc. The program and the object program of the time-series figure display sub-program are linked-edited to generate a time-series figure display program E05.

[Explanation of FIG. 191] FIG. 191 is a flowchart of the overall functions of the NGEN processing steps of the present invention, and the procedure is as follows. (1) From the NCAD processing step, it is determined whether the method of inputting the blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 is one computer (using the file function) or two computers (using the communication function). (2) When there is only one computer, the blinking unit coordinate figure data B0 is changed from the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07.
8 is read and written in the main memory. (3) When there are two computers, the second communication means C2
The blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 transmitted from No. 2 is written in the main storage device. (4) The source program of the time-series graphic display sub-program for executing the simulation display is generated from the input blinking unit coordinate graphic data B08 by the time-series graphic display sub-program generation function NG1. (5) Time-series graphic display program generation function The translation function of NG2 calls a ready-made translation program (compiler) to translate the source program of the generated (C-language) time-series graphic display sub-program to make a time series. Generate the object program of the graphic display subprogram. (6) Time-series graphic display program generation function The link editing function of NG2 calls a ready-made link editing program (linkage editor) to make a main program for control functions such as ready-made hardware and the above time-series graphic display sub-program. Edit the object program of
A load module for the time series graphic display program E05 is generated.

[2150] FIG. 192 is a functional hierarchy diagram of the simulation display control program NDSP processing step shown in FIG. 12, and each function is shown below.

As described above, in the NDSP processing step of FIG. 12, the blinking time series transmission data B12 is stored during the operation of the blinking time series program NRGS when the number of computers is one, and the blinking time series transmission data B12 is stored. Program NRG
After S is stopped, the time-series graphic display program E05 for displaying the simulation graphic is activated to execute the simulation display. Therefore, when there is only one computer, the communication function ND4 is not used, and therefore the function [3] below is unnecessary.

[1] The time series graphic display program activation function ND2 reads the time series graphic display program E05 output from the NGEN operation step and stored in the auxiliary storage device (time series graphic display program storage device C15). , Write to main memory.

[2] Blinking time series transmission data file function ND3 reads the blinking time series transmission data B12 output from the NRGS operation step from the auxiliary storage device and writes it in the main storage device. [3] The communication function ND4 writes the blinking time-series transmission data B12 output from the main storage device of the first computer to the first communication means C21 in real time to the main storage device of the second computer.

[2156] [4] Simulation display execution function ND
Reference numeral 1 is the flashing time-series transmission data B12 written in the main storage device according to the above [2] or [3], whether or not there is flashing for each scene, and the flashing color data, and the time-series graphic read from the main storage device. Screen display RGB dot data B17 consisting of data for one scene of the display program E05
Are sequentially output to the simulation display execution device C26 (for example, the display C20) to display the simulation.

[5] Hard copy function ND5 outputs the image data B10d of the edit screen to the hard copy device C19. [6] The video interface ND6 stores the video image data B10c in the video storage device C11f.

[2160] [Explanation of FIG. 193] FIG. 193 is an NDSP main storage device data area diagram showing the data area of the main storage device in the program NDSP processing step. The data area shown in the figure is as follows. (1) NDSP area A. NDSP program area ... Area for writing program NDSP B. Display screen area: An area in which the screen display RGB dot data B17 generated from the determined blinking data and the determined segment type data of the display figure is written. Other data area: Area for writing E05 file name used by NDSP, constants such as input method flags, variables, etc. (2) E05 area A. E05 program area: area for writing the program of the time series graphic display program E05 output from the NGEN operation step B. Coordinate graphic area: area for writing the coordinate graphic data of the time-series graphic display program E05 output from the NGEN operation step C. Blinking time-series transmission data area: area for writing data for one scene of blinking time-series transmission data B12 D. Other data area: Area for writing constants, variables, etc. used by E05

[Explanation of FIG. 194] FIG. 194 (A) is a flowchart of the program NDSP for opening / closing the blinking time-series transmission data file, starting / ending communication, and activating the time-series graphic display program E05.
FIG. 194 (B) shows screen display RGB dot data B17.
Is a flowchart of execution of a time-series graphic display program for generating and writing in the main memory, and the procedure described in FIG.

[Explanation of FIG. 194 (A)] (1) One computer (uses file function)
Determine the input method for two or two (using the communication function). A. When there is only one computer, the blinking time series transmission data file is opened. B. When there are two computers, communication is started (turned on). (2) The time-series figure display program starting function ND2 of the NDSP processing step starts up the time-series figure display program E05 shown in FIG.
Write to the E05 area of the main memory shown in. (3) When the end command of the blinking time-series transmission data B12 of FIG. 194 (B), which will be described later, is determined, it is input again whether one computer (uses the file function) or two computers (uses the communication function). Determine the method. (4) When the number of computers is one, the blinking time-series transmission data file is closed, and when there are two computers, the communication is ended (off).

[Explanation of FIG. 194 (B)] (1) Pre-processing (file end flag is turned off). (2) When the time-series figure display program E05 is started by the time-series figure display program starting function ND2 of FIG. 194 (A) described above, the time-series figure display program E0 stored in the time-series figure display program storage device C15.
5 is read, the program of the program E05 (time-series graphic display) is written in the E05 program area of the E05 area, the coordinate graphic data of the program E05 is written in the coordinate graphic area, and the program E0 is written in the other data area.
Write the other data of 5. (3) The data of one scene of the blinking time series transmission data B12 is read from the main storage device or the auxiliary storage device of the NRGS operation step, and is written in the blinking time series transmission data region of the E05 area of the main storage device to create a loop. Start. (4) The procedure for reading the blinking time-series transmission data B12 for one scene is as follows depending on whether there is one computer or two computers, as shown in FIG. 195 described later. A. When there is only one computer, the data for one scene of the blinking time-series transmission data B12 stored in the auxiliary storage device (blinking time-series transmission data storage device C14) is read from the main storage device of the NRGS operation step, and the data shown in FIG. Write to the blinking time-series transmission data area of the E05 area of the main memory shown in FIG. B. When there are two computers, the blinking time-series transmission data B12 is read in real time from the main storage device of the NRGS operation step by the first communication means C21 (communication function ND4), and the blinking of the E05 area of the main storage device is performed. Write to the time-series transmission data area.

(5) The blinking state (on / off and lighting color) is determined from the data of one scene of the blinking time series transmission data B12 read from the blinking time series transmission data area of the E05 area of the main memory. . (6) As shown in FIG. 196 described later, E of the main storage device
The type of segment for each unit of the display graphic to be displayed is discriminated from the coordinate graphic data written in the coordinate graphic area of area 05. (7) The screen display RGB dot data B17 is generated from the segment type data for each unit of the display graphic determined in (6) above and the blinking state data determined in (5) above. Write to the display screen area of the NDSP area of the storage device. (8) Blinking time series transmission data B12 for the next one scene
The data is read and the above steps (5) to (7) are repeated. (9) When the blinking time-series transmission data B12 ends, FIG.
As shown in 95, the end code is discriminated, the file end flag is turned on, and the loop is ended. (10) The screen display RGB dot data B17 stored in the display screen area of the NDSP area of the main memory is sequentially read and displayed on the simulation display execution device C26 (for example, the display C20).

[2180] [Explanation of FIG. 195] FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the procedure for reading the data for one scene of the blinking time-series transmission data, and the procedure described in the figure is shown below. A. When there is only one computer, the data for one scene of the blinking time series transmission data B12 stored in the NRGS operation step is read from the auxiliary storage device and written in the blinking time series transmission data region of the E05 area of the main storage device. The data for one scene of the blinking time-series transmission data written in this main memory is read until the data is completed (the blinking time-series transmission data file function N
D3). When the reading of the data of all the scenes is completed, the end code is discriminated and the file end flag is turned on. B. When there are two computers, the first communication means C21 reads in real time every one scene of the blinking time-series transmission data B12 of the main memory of the first computer until the data is completed (communication function ND4 ). When the transmission of the data of all the scenes is completed, the end code is discriminated and the file end flag is turned on.

[Explanation of FIG. 196] FIG. 196 shows a procedure for determining the data of each unit for each scene of the time-series graphic display program E05 written in the main storage device and simulating the display graphic of each unit. It is a flowchart and the procedure described in the same figure is shown below. (1) Loop 1 is started to count the number of units. (2) Loop 2 is started to count the number of segments in each unit. (3) The type of figure of the segment of the first unit of the data for one scene is discriminated, and the line segment, polyline, polygon,
The display graphic data of the segment of the first unit for displaying a simulation such as a circle is output. (4) When the total number of segments of each unit is counted, loop 2 is ended and the next loop 1 is started. (5) The type of the graphic of the segment of the second unit in (3) above is determined, the display graphic data of the second unit is output, and the number of units is repeated. (6) The above procedures (1) to (4) are repeated for the number of scenes of blinking time-series transmission data. (7) Loop 1 ends when the total number of units is counted.

[Explanation of FIG. 197] FIG. 197 is an explanatory diagram of a simulation display procedure for displaying the screen display RGB dot data B17 on the simulation display execution device C26 (for example, the display C20). (1) The time-series graphic display program E05 output from the NGEN operation step is written in the main storage device. (2) The blinking time-series transmission data B12 output from the NRGS operation step is read from the auxiliary storage device and written in the main storage device, or output from the main storage device of the first computer to the first communication unit C21. The blinking time-series transmission data B12 is written in the main memory of the second computer in real time. (3) Whether the blinking time-series transmission data B12 written in the main storage device by the above (1) or (2) is blinking and the blinking color data, and the time-series graphic display program E05 read from the main storage device. The screen display RGB dot data B17 composed of coordinate figure data is displayed on the simulation display execution device C26 (for example, the display C2).
It is output to 0) and the simulation is displayed.

[Explanation of FIG. 198] FIG. 198 shows the image data of the editing screen displayed on the screen or the screen display RGB.
It is a hard copy procedure explanatory drawing which hard-copys dot data B17, Comprising: Screen display RGB dot data B17
Is converted into image data B10d of the editing screen by the hard copy function ND5 and output to the hard copy device C19.

[Explanation of FIG. 199] FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining the video storage procedure of the screen display RGB dot data B17 of the edit screen, which is the screen display RGB dot data B17.
Is converted into video image data B10c by the video interface ND6, and the video storage device C11f is converted.
Output to.

[Effect of Simulation Display Execution Method] The effects of the “simulation display execution method” of the present invention are as follows. (1) It can be efficiently and easily displayed on the display of a computer without consuming an image material. (2) A continuous blinking state can be easily visually confirmed by displaying a simulation on a computer display.

(3) By using two computers, one computer blinks time series data B1.
It is possible to generate or edit 1 and display the simulation on the display of the other computer immediately (in real time). (4) Even when there is only one computer, after the blinking time series transmission data B12 is stored in the auxiliary storage device by the blinking time series transmission data file function NR8,
Time series graphic display program E0 in NDSP processing step
By starting 5 and executing the simulation display, the blinking state can be visually checked.

[2300] [Explanation of FIGS. 200 to 209] FIG.
13 is an NSEQ upper function hierarchy diagram in which only the functions are extracted from the above-described NSEQ external connection function diagram, and the upper functions are the same as the functions in the NSEQ external connection function diagram of FIG. 13 described above. The numbers of the lower-level function hierarchy diagram, which is a subdivision of the higher-level function shown in the figure, are shown below. (1) System function NS1 (FIG. 201) (2) Setting function NS2 (FIG. 202) (3) Blinking time series data file function NS3 (FIG. 20)
3) (4) Figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5 (Fig. 2
04 and FIG. 205) (5) Screen operation function NS6 (FIG. 206) (6) Blinking display execution control function NS7 (FIG. 207) (7) Graphic blink sequence data file function NS8
(Fig. 208) (8) Print function NS9 (Fig. 209) (9) Hard copy function NS10

FIG. 201 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system function NS1. The system functions shown in FIG. 201 are shown below. (1) Clear ... Initializes the pattern blink sequence data. (2) Execution of command ... Execute an OS command. (3) End ... End NRGS.

FIG. 202 is a figure blinking sequence data B.
Setting of each condition when 13 is edited (hereinafter referred to as "figure blinking sequence data editing") and when graphic blinking display device control data B15 is output to perform graphic blinking display (hereinafter referred to as "graphic blinking display execution"). It is a setting function hierarchy diagram in which the function NS2 is subdivided, and the setting conditions described in the figure are shown below. (1) Cycle setting: Set the cycle when the graphic blinking display is executed. (2) Maximum unit number setting ... Set the maximum number of units when editing the figure blinking sequence data and executing the figure blinking display. (3) Start scene setting ... Set the start scene when the graphic blinking display is executed. (4) End scene setting ... Set the end scene when the figure blinking display is executed. (5) Maximum scene setting ... Set the maximum scene when editing the figure blinking sequence data and executing the figure blinking display. (6) Setting the number of display cells: Set the number of cells displayed on one screen (it is automatically redisplayed after setting). A. Default value ... Set to the default value of this program. B. Arbitrary ... Set the number of vertical and horizontal cells displayed on one screen. b1. Vertical direction: Set the number of cells in the vertical (scene) direction to be displayed on one screen. b2. Horizontal direction ... Set the number of cells in the horizontal (unit) direction to be displayed on one screen.

FIG. 203 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data file function NS3. The blinking time-series data file function reads the blinking time-series data B11 stored in the auxiliary storage device and writes and stores it in the main storage device.

[2333] The blinking time series data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device.

[2340] FIG. 204 is a figure blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (1/2) showing subordinate functions of the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5. The figure blinking sequence data editing operation shown in FIG. Is shown below. (1) Color selection: Set the lighting color or turn off the light. (2) Erase all (clear) ... Turns off all scenes of all units. (3) Lighting setting and extinguishing setting ... When the cell of the corresponding unit and scene is designated in the cell area of the graphic blinking sequence data, the lighting setting and the extinguishing setting alternate, and the color selected at the time of lighting is selected. Is displayed. (4) Light-off setting ... Select [Black] in the color selection and indicate the relevant cell to turn it off. (5) Background pattern selection ... Select the background blinking change state. (6) Background pattern setting ... Sets the background blinking change state. (7) Line editing ... Sets the blinking state to a line shape all at once. (8) Rectangle edit ... The blinking state is collectively set to a rectangle. (9) Triangular edit ... Sets the blinking status to a triangular shape all at once. (10) Scene duplication ... Copies the scene with the cursor. (11) Delete single scene ... Delete one scene with cursor. (12) Unit duplication ... Copy the unit with the cursor. (13) Delete single unit ... Delete one unit with cursor. (14) Scene selection ... Select one or more target scenes to insert, copy, delete or move. (15) Insert scene ... Between one scene and the next,
Insert the preselected scene (s). (16) Scene copy ... Between one scene and the next,
Copy the preselected scene (s).

[2350] FIG. 205 is a figure blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5. The figure blinking sequence data editing operation shown in FIG. Is shown below. (1) Delete scene ... Deletes a preselected scene (s) between one scene and the next. (2) Scene movement ... Between one scene and the next,
Move the preselected scene (s). (3) Unit selection ... Select one or more units to be inserted, copied, deleted, or moved. (4) Unit insertion: A preselected unit (s) are inserted between one unit and the next unit. (5) Copy unit: Copy a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next. (6) Delete unit ... Delete a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next unit. (7) Move unit: Move a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next. (8) Specifying the number of chips ... Specify the number of chips to be used. (9) Chip number designation ... Designate the chip number of the allocation destination. (10) Specify distribution range: Specify the range of cells to be allocated to the specified chip number. A. Scene start point… Specifies the start point of the range in the scene direction. End point ... Specify the end point of the range in the scene direction. B. Unit start point: Specify the start point of the unit direction range. End point: Specify the end point of the unit direction range. C. Designate the number of recording units ... Designate the maximum number of units to be recorded on one chip. D. Designation of number of recorded scenes ... Designate the maximum number of scenes to be recorded on one chip.

[2360] FIG. 206 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the screen operation function NS6, and the screen operations shown in the figure are shown below. (1) Scroll up ... Moves the cell display area upward. (2) Scroll down ... Moves the cell display area downward. (3) Scroll left ... Moves the cell display area to the left. (4) Scroll right ... Moves the cell display area to the right. (5) Home set: The cell display area is moved to the first unit of the first scene. (6) Scroll unit setting: The scroll unit is set to one unit for one scene or half screen. (7) Redisplay ... Redisplay the cell display area for one scene.

[2370] FIG. 207 is a blinking display execution control function NS7.
FIG. 9 is a hierarchical display diagram of a blinking display execution control function showing subordinate functions, in which the blinking time-series transmission data B12 is added with data such as execution start and end of blinking display, setting of pause scene, etc. The device control data B15 is generated.

The blinking display execution control operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Start execution of graphic blinking display ... Start execution of graphic blinking display. (2) End of execution of graphic blinking display ... Cancel execution of graphic blinking display. (3) Temporary stop point setting: Specify the scene in which you want to suspend the execution of the graphic blinking display. (4) Resume after pausing ... Waiting for input from the keyboard or coordinate input device to resume.

[2380] FIG. 208 is a figure blinking sequence data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the figure blinking sequence data file function NS8. The figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 reads the figure blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device and writes and stores it in the auxiliary storage device (graphic blinking sequence data storage device C27) or stored in the auxiliary storage device. Read the data and write it in the main memory to edit it.

[2382] The figure blink sequence data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device. (7) Writing ... Writing and saving data in the auxiliary storage device (with overwrite confirmation).

[2390] FIG. 209 shows figure blink sequence data B.
13 or a figure blinking display device control data B15 is a print function hierarchy diagram showing a subordinate function obtained by subdividing the print function NS9 for printing on a printer or outputting to a file, and the print operation described in the figure is shown below. (1) Horizontal start page designation: Specifies the page number in the horizontal direction to start printing when printing the pattern blink sequence data. (2) Specifying the horizontal end page ... When printing the figure blinking sequence data, specify the horizontal page number to end the printing. (3) Vertical start page designation: When printing pattern blink sequence data, specify the vertical page number to start printing. (4) Vertical end page designation: When the figure blinking sequence data is printed, specify the vertical page number to end printing. (5) Horizontal page size designation: Specifies the number of units per page to be printed in the horizontal direction when printing the figure blinking sequence data. (6) Vertical page size designation: Specifies the number of scenes per page to be printed in the vertical direction when the figure blinking sequence data is printed. (7) Output content selection ... System information or graphic blink sequence data is selected. (8) Output destination selection ... Printer printing or file output is selected. (9) Device setting: Set the device type and the like. (10) Printing work: Printing on a printer or outputting to a file. (11) Range Rectangle Designation: Specify the print range as a rectangle on the screen.

[Explanation of FIG. 210] FIG. 210 shows NRGS.
After reading the blinking time-series data B11 input to the auxiliary storage device from the processing step, the graphic blinking display device C2 is read.
7 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure until controlling No. 7, and the operation procedure is as follows. (1) Blinking time series data file function NS3
The blinking time-series data B11 is read from the auxiliary storage device (blinking time-series data storage device C09) and written in the main storage device. (2) Blinking time series data B11 written in the main memory
By the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5. Re-edit the blinking time series data B11, and B. Sequence program storage medium C2 as an aggregate
C. to generate graphic blinking sequence data B13 divided into a plurality of data for storage in a plurality of chips forming C.4. The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in an auxiliary storage device (graphic blinking sequence data storage device C11a) described later is read and written in the main storage device for editing.

(3) The figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 writes and stores the figure blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device to the auxiliary storage device (the figure blinking sequence data storage device C11a). Also, from the auxiliary storage device (graphic blink sequence data storage device C11a), the graphic blink sequence data B1
3 is read and written in the main memory. (4) The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in the auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device, output to the sequence program generating device C23, and recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24. (5) After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24 and output to the medium data display control device C31 to control the graphic blinking display device C27. (6) The blinking display execution control function NS7 edits the blinking time series data B11 into graphic blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units. (7) This edited figure blinking display device control data B15
Is output to the graphic blinking display control device C29 to control the graphic blinking display device C27.

[Explanation of FIG. 211] FIG.
It is an operation procedure explanatory view of the figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 for reading and writing the figure blinking sequence data B13 generated or edited by the procedure of, and the operation procedure is as follows. (1) Graphic flash sequence data B13 from main memory
Is read and written in the auxiliary storage device (graphic blink sequence data storage device C11a). (2) The graphic blinking sequence data B13 is read from the auxiliary storage device (graphic blinking sequence data storage device C11a) and written in the main storage device.

[Explanation of FIG. 212] FIG. 212 is a blinking display execution control function NS for blinking the graphic blinking display device C27.
FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram of the operation procedure of FIG. 7, in which the blinking time series data B11 written in the main storage device by the procedure of FIG.
It is converted into the figure blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units for performing blinking such as repeated blinking portions, the number of repetitions, and pauses, and output to the figure blinking display control device C29 which controls the figure blinking display device C27. . The graphic blinking display device C27 is a blinking display device in which a plurality of actual blinking display units (for example, one neon tube) are collected.

[Explanation of FIG. 213] FIG. 213 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of the printing function NS9. The figure blinking sequence data B13 or the figure blinking display device control data B15 written in the main memory by the procedure of FIG. It has a function of printing in the printing device C17 and a function of storing in the auxiliary storage device (graphic blink sequence data storage device C11a).

[Explanation of FIG. 214] FIG. 214 is a hard copy function NS10 for copying the image data B10d of the edit screen displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C19.
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of FIG.

[2450] [Explanation of FIG. 215] FIG. 215 (A) shows the initial state of the figure blinking sequence data in a state where the blinking time series data B11 shown in FIG. 118 (A) is read and the figure blinking sequence data B13 is initialized. It is explanatory drawing of a state. Although all the units and all scenes of the initialized figure blinking sequence data of FIG. 116 (A) described above are set to the initial state of turning off the black, the initialized figure blinking sequence shown in FIG. 215 (A). The initial state of data is already lit in red. The reason is,
This is because the blinking time-series data B11 of the edited FIG. 118 (A) and FIG. 118 (B) is read.

[2452] FIG. 215 (B) is a memory explanatory diagram showing the initial state of the main memory device in a state where the graphic blinking sequence data B13 of the main memory device has been initialized. For the same reason as above, the initial state of the initialized main storage device shown in FIG. 215 (B) is already in the red lighting state.

[2454] In the initial state of the graphic blinking sequence data, as shown in the initial state explanatory diagram of the graphic blinking sequence data of FIG. 215 (A) and the initial state storage explanatory diagram of the main storage device of FIG. 215 (B), The plurality of chip numbers forming the sequence program storage medium C24 and the unit number of the blinking unitized data match.

[Explanation of FIG. 216] FIG. 216 (A) is an explanatory diagram of an editing process in which the graphic blinking sequence data B13 in the initial state of the graphic blinking sequence data of FIG. 215 (A) is edited.

[2462] FIG. 216 (B) is a memory explanatory diagram of the main memory device in the editing process in which the graphic blinking sequence data B13 of the initial state memory explanatory diagram of the main memory device of FIG. 215 (B) is edited.

[2464] In the process of editing the graphic blinking sequence data, each figure of FIG. 216 (A) is an explanatory view of the initial state of the graphic blinking sequence data and FIG. As shown, the plurality of chip numbers forming the sequence program storage medium C24 as an aggregate are different from the unit number of the blinking unitized data. It shows that blinking unitized data of scenes 1 to 12 of unit number 1 and unit number 2 is written to the first chip (chip number 1), and unit number is written to the second chip (chip number 2). It shows that blinking unitized data of scenes 1 to 12 of unit numbers 3 to 5 is written.

[Explanation of FIG. 217] FIG. 217 (A) is a storage medium data division explanatory diagram for dividing the blinking unitized data B07 for writing in the sequence program storage medium C24 formed from a plurality of chips. As shown in the figure, it is shown that blinking unitized data of scenes 1 to 12 of unit number 1 and unit number 2 is written to the first chip (chip number 1), and the second chip (chip number 1). 2), unit number 3 to unit number 5
It is shown that the blinking unitized data of scenes 1 to 12 are written.

As shown in FIG. 82, the unit number 1 includes the blinking unitized data B07 of the segment numbers 1 and 2, and the unit number 2 includes the blinking unitized data B07 of the segment numbers 3 to 5. Unit number 3 includes blinking unitized data B07 of segment number 6, unit number 4 includes blinking unitized data B07 of segment numbers 7 and 8, and unit number 5 includes blinking unitized data of segment number 9 It contains data B07.
These segments are the blinking display units of the graphic blinking device. The position of the coordinate graphic corresponding to each of the above segment numbers is as shown in FIG. 4 or FIG.

[2474] FIG. 217 (B) is a storage medium blinking state explanatory view showing the blinking data written in each chip. As shown in the figure, the first chip of the first chip (chip number 1)
It indicates that blinking data of scenes 1 to 12 of unit number 1 and unit number 2 are written in the bit and the second bit, respectively, and the second chip (chip number 2)
In the first bit to the third bit, the blinking data of the scenes 1 to 12 of the unit numbers 3 to 5 is written.

[Explanation of FIG. 218] FIG. 218 shows a plurality of chips forming a sequence program storage medium C24 in which the graphic blinking sequence data B13 is aggregated.
FIG. 3A is a data division multiple-chip storage explanatory diagram for dividing and storing blinking data for changing the blinking state, FIG.
2 and (B) match the blinking data of the character [ABCDE] in FIG. 2 described above.

As shown in FIG. 27A, the unit number 1 (letter A) and unit number 2 are assigned to the first and second bits of the first chip (chip number 1), respectively.
(Character B) scene 1 (t1) to scene 12 (t1)
It shows that the blinking data of 2) is written. Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, scenes 1 to 3 of unit number 3 (letter C) to unit number 5 (letter E) are assigned to the first to third bits of the second chip (chip number 2). 12
Indicates that the blinking data of has been written. Note that in FIG. 7A, all 0s are written in the 3rd to 8th bits of the first chip, and in FIG. 7B, the 4th to 8th bits of the first chip are written. All 0s are written is the blink information (blink data)
Indicates that is not written.

[2480] [Description of FIG. 219] FIG. 219 shows the blinking data for changing the blinking state and the adjustment for changing the brightness in a plurality of chips forming the sequence program storage medium C24 as an aggregate of the blinking sequence data B13. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a data division multi-chip storage in which optical data is divided and stored, and FIGS. (A) and (B) show the brightness in the lighting state of each scene of the character [ABCDE] in FIG. 2 described above. The data that changes is written.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the first and second bits of the first chip (chip number 1) have unit number 1 (letter A) and unit number 2 respectively.
It indicates that blinking data of scenes 1 to 12 (character B) is written. Further, as shown in FIG.
The blinking data of the scenes 1 to 12 of the unit number 3 (character C) to the unit number 5 (character E) is written in the first bit to the third bit of the second chip (chip number 2). Show.

[2484] In the same figure (A), the third of the first chip
Although the dimming data is not written in the bit and the fourth bit, the binary dimming data in the stages of 0 to 15 is written in the fifth bit to the eighth bit of the first chip. ing. Further, in the same figure (B), the binary dimming data of the stages from 0 to 15 are written in the 3rd bit to the 8th bit of the second chip.

[Explanation of FIG. 220] In FIG. 220, the graphic blinking display device control data B15 stored in the sequence program storage medium C24 is read and output to the medium data display control device C31 to display the graphic blinking display device C27. It is a storage medium blinking execution apparatus relationship diagram which performs blinking. The medium data display control device C31 is a switching control device S.
C1 to SC8 and switching elements TH1 to TH8
And blinking display power supplies NT1 to NT8. The graphic blinking display device C27 is formed from graphic blinking display light sources 1 to 4 (for example, a set of four neon tubes) 5 to 8, ..., 29 to 32 that blink simultaneously.

As shown in the figure, in the horizontal direction of the chip 1, flashing data of scenes 1 to 12 (lighting when 1 is ON,
0 is off and off) is stored. In the vertical direction of the chip 1, the blinking state of the blinking display unit (segment) of the graphic blinking display device C27 for each scene is stored. Flash data for each scene from chip 1 (lights when 1 is on,
2 turns off and turns off), and the switching element TH1
Through TH8 to output to the switching element TH1
Thru TH8 is turned on and off. This switching element T
Blinking the output of H1 to TH8 Display power supply devices NT1 to N
The graphic blinking display light sources which are respectively supplied to T8 and blink simultaneously are turned on or off. The blinking data for each scene read from the chip 2 is the same as the blinking data of the chip 1.

[Effect of graphic blinking display device control method] [Effect of graphic blinking display device control method] of the present invention is as follows. (1) By displaying the blinking time-series data B11 on the display of the computer, it is possible to re-edit efficiently and easily without consuming the image material. (2) The sequence program storage medium C2 as an aggregate by the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5
4, the figure blinking sequence data B13 divided into a plurality of data to be stored in a plurality of chips forming 4
It can be generated interactively, efficiently and easily without consuming art materials. (3) By the blinking display execution control function NS7, the blinking time-series data B11 is changed to the blinking repeated portion of the figure blinking display device C27 (in the actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions,
It is possible to interactively and efficiently and easily edit the graphic blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units to be blinked such as temporarily stopped.

(4) The edited graphic blinking display device control data B15 can be output to the graphic blinking display control device C29 to blink the graphic blinking display device C27 efficiently and easily. (5) The figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 reads the figure blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device and writes it to the auxiliary storage device (the figure blinking sequence data storage device C11a) without consuming the image material. The data stored in the auxiliary storage device can be read and written in the main storage device for efficient and easy reediting.

(6) The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in this auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device and output to the sequence program generating device C23, so that the sequence program can be stored efficiently in a small storage space. It can be recorded on the medium C24. After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24, and the medium data display control device C3 is read.
1 to control the graphic blinking display device C27. (7) With the print function NS9, the graphic blinking sequence data B13 or the graphic blinking display device control data B15 can be printed on the printing device C17 and efficiently and easily visually confirmed.

[2500] [Explanation of FIG. 221] FIG. 221 is an NSEP upper function hierarchy diagram in which only functions are extracted from the above-mentioned NSEP external connection function diagram of FIG. 14, and the upper functions are the NSEP external connection functions of FIG. It has the same function as the function diagram. The numbers of the lower-level function hierarchy diagram, which is a subdivision of the higher-level function shown in the figure, are shown below. (1) System function NP1 (FIG. 222) (2) Setting function NP2 (FIG. 223) (3) Blinking time series data file function NP3 (FIG. 22)
4) (4) Flashing unit coordinate figure data file function NP4 (Fig. 225) (5) Panel flashing sequence data editing function NP5 (Figs. 226 and 227) (6) Screen operation function NP6 (Fig. 228) (7) Flashing display Execution control function NP7 (Fig. 229) (8) Panel blink sequence data file function NP8
(Fig. 230) (9) Print function NP9 (Fig. 231) (10) Hard copy function NP10

[Explanation of FIG. 222] FIG. 222 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system function NP1, and the system functions described in the same figure are shown below. (1) Clear ... Initializes the panel blinking sequence data. (2) Execution of command ... Execute an OS command. (3) End ... End NRGS.

[Explanation of FIG. 223] FIG. 223 shows that when the panel blinking sequence data B14 is edited (hereinafter referred to as panel blinking sequence data editing) and the panel blinking display device control data B16 is output, the panel blinking display is executed. FIG. 9 is a hierarchical setting function diagram in which the setting function NP2 for each condition when performing the following (hereinafter, referred to as when the panel blinking display is executed) is subdivided, and the setting conditions described in FIG. (1) Cycle setting: Set the cycle when the panel blinking display is executed. (2) Maximum unit number setting: Set the maximum number of units when editing the panel blinking sequence data and executing the panel blinking display. (3) Start scene setting ... Set the start scene when the panel blinking display is executed. (4) End scene setting: Set the end scene when the panel blinking display is executed. (5) Maximum scene setting ... Sets the maximum scene for panel blink sequence data editing and panel blink display execution. (6) Setting the number of display cells: Set the number of cells displayed on one screen (it is automatically redisplayed after setting). A. Default value ... Set to the default value of this program. B. Arbitrary ... Set the number of vertical and horizontal cells displayed on one screen. b1. Vertical direction: Set the number of cells in the vertical (scene) direction to be displayed on one screen. b2. Horizontal direction ... Set the number of cells in the horizontal (unit) direction to be displayed on one screen.

[Explanation of FIG. 224] FIG. 224 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data file function NP3. The blinking time-series data file function reads the blinking time-series data B11 stored in the auxiliary storage device and writes and stores it in the main storage device.

[2532] The blinking time series data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Read the blinking time series data B11 stored in the auxiliary storage device.

[Explanation of FIG. 225] FIG. 225 is a blinking unit coordinate figure data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unit coordinate figure data file function NP4. The blinking unit coordinate figure data file function reads the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 stored in the auxiliary storage device (blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07) and writes and stores it in the main storage device.

The operation of the blinking unit coordinate figure data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Read the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 stored in the auxiliary storage device.

[Explanation of FIG. 226] FIG. 226 is a panel blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (1) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blinking sequence data editing function NP5.
/ 2), and the panel blink sequence data editing operation shown in FIG. (1) Color selection: Set the lighting color or turn off the light. (2) Erase all (clear) ... Turns off all scenes of all units. (3) Lighting setting and extinguishing setting ... In the cell area of the panel blinking sequence data, when the cell of the corresponding unit and the corresponding scene is designated, the lighting setting and the extinguishing setting are alternately changed,
When it is lit, it is displayed in the selected color. (4) Light-off setting ... Select [Black] in the color selection and indicate the relevant cell to turn it off. (5) Background pattern selection ... Select the background blinking change state. (6) Background pattern setting ... Sets the background blinking change state. (7) Line editing ... Sets the blinking state to a line shape all at once. (8) Rectangle edit ... The blinking state is collectively set to a rectangle. (9) Triangular edit ... Sets the blinking status to a triangular shape all at once. (10) Scene duplication ... Duplicate the scene with the cursor. (11) Delete single scene ... Delete one scene with cursor. (12) Unit duplication ... Duplicate the unit with the cursor. (13) Delete single unit ... Delete one unit with cursor. (14) Scene selection ... Select one or more target scenes to insert, copy, delete or move. (15) Insert scene ... Between one scene and the next,
Insert the preselected scene (s). (16) Scene copy ... Between one scene and the next,
Copy the preselected scene (s).

[Explanation of FIG. 227] FIG. 227 is a panel blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blinking sequence data editing function NP5.
/ 2), and the panel blink sequence data editing operation shown in FIG. (1) Delete scene ... Deletes a preselected scene (s) between one scene and the next. (2) Scene movement ... Between one scene and the next,
Move the preselected scene (s). (3) Unit selection ... Select one or more units to be inserted, copied, deleted, or moved. (4) Unit insertion: A preselected unit (s) are inserted between one unit and the next unit. (5) Copy unit: Copy a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next. (6) Delete unit ... Delete a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next unit. (7) Move unit: Move a preselected unit (s) between one unit and the next. (8) Specifying the number of chips ... Specify the number of chips to be used. (9) Chip number designation ... Designate the chip number of the allocation destination. (10) Specify distribution range: Specify the range of cells to be allocated to the specified chip number. A. Scene start point… Specifies the start point of the range in the scene direction. End point ... Specify the end point of the range in the scene direction. B. Unit start point: Specify the start point of the unit direction range. End point: Specify the end point of the unit direction range. C. Designate the number of recording units ... Designate the maximum number of units to be recorded on one chip. D. Designation of number of recorded scenes ... Designate the maximum number of scenes to be recorded on one chip.

[Explanation of FIG. 228] FIG. 228 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the screen operation function NP6, and the screen operations described in the figure are shown below. (1) Scroll up ... Moves the cell display area upward. (2) Scroll down ... Moves the cell display area downward. (3) Scroll left ... Moves the cell display area to the left. (4) Scroll right ... Moves the cell display area to the right. (5) Home set: The cell display area is moved to the first unit of the first scene. (6) Scroll unit setting: Set one scene or one unit or half screen. (7) Redisplay ... Redisplay the cell display area for one scene.

[Explanation of FIG. 229] FIG. 229 is a blinking display execution control function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking display execution control function NP7.
The panel blinking display device control data B16 to which data such as the start and end of execution of the blinking display and the setting of the pause scene is added to 12 is generated.

[2572] The blinking display execution control operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Start execution of panel blinking display ... Start execution of panel blinking display. (2) Execution of the panel blinking display is terminated. (3) Temporary stop point setting: Specify the scene in which you want to suspend the execution of the panel blinking display. (4) Resume after pausing ... Waiting for input from the keyboard or coordinate input device to resume.

[Explanation of FIG. 230] FIG. 230 is a panel blinking sequence data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blinking sequence data file function NP8. Panel blink sequence data file function N
P8 reads the panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device and writes it to the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b) for storage, or reads the data stored in the auxiliary storage device. , Write to main memory.

[2582] The panel blink sequence data file operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Select target drive ... Selects or inputs the drive of the data file. (2) Select target path ... Selects or inputs the path name (directory) of the data file. (3) Select target file name ... Select or input the name of the data file. (4) Table switching ... Switching between the detailed mode and the list mode. (5) Scroll ... Scrolls the file list display. (6) Read ... Reads data from the auxiliary storage device. (7) Writing ... Writing and saving data in the auxiliary storage device (with overwrite confirmation).

[Explanation of FIG. 231] FIG. 231 is a printing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the printing function NP9 for printing the panel blinking sequence data B14 or the panel blinking display device control data B16 to the printer or outputting to the file. The printing operation shown in the figure is shown below. (1) Designation of horizontal start page: Specifies the page number in the horizontal direction to start printing when printing the panel blinking sequence data. (2) Horizontal end page designation: Specifies the page number in the horizontal direction to end printing when printing the panel blinking sequence data. (3) Vertical start page designation: Specifies the page number in the vertical direction to start printing when printing the panel blinking sequence data. (4) Vertical end page designation: When the panel blinking sequence data is printed, specify the vertical page number to end printing. (5) Horizontal page size designation: Specifies the number of units per page to be printed in the horizontal direction during panel blink sequence data printing. (6) Vertical page size designation: Specifies the number of scenes per page to be printed in the vertical direction during panel blink sequence data printing. (7) Output content selection ... Select system information or panel blink sequence data. (8) Output destination selection ... Printer printing or file output is selected. (9) Device setting: Set the device type and so on. (10) Printing work: Printing on a printer or outputting to a file. (11) Range Rectangle Designation: Specify the print range as a rectangle on the screen.

[2600] [Explanation of FIG. 232] FIG. 232 shows NRGS.
After reading the blinking time-series data B11 input to the auxiliary storage device from the processing step, the panel blinking display device C is read.
It is an operation procedure explanatory diagram until controlling 28, and the operation procedure is as follows. (1) Blinking time series data file function NP3
The flashing time series data B11 is read from the auxiliary storage device (flashing time series data storage device C09) and stored in the main storage device. (2) The blinking unit coordinate figure data file function NP4 reads the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 from the auxiliary storage device (blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07) and stores it in the main storage device.

(3) The blinking time-series data B11 and the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 stored in the main memory are set by the panel blinking sequence data editing function NP5. Re-edit the blinking time series data B11, and B. Sequence program storage medium C2 as an aggregate
Panel flashing sequence data B14 divided into a plurality of pieces of data is stored in order to be stored in the plurality of chips forming the data No. 4. C. The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in an auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b) described later is read and written in the main storage device for editing.

(4) The panel blinking sequence data file function NP8 writes and stores the panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device into the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b). Further, the panel blinking sequence data B14 is read from the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b) and written in the main storage device.

(5) The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in this auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device, output to the sequence program generating device C23, and recorded in the sequence program storage medium C24. (6) After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24 and output to the medium data display control device C31 to control the panel blinking display device C28.

[710] (7) The blinking display execution control function NP7 edits the blinking time series data B11 into panel blinking display device control data B16 divided into blinking display units. (8) This edited panel blinking display device control data B1
6 is output to the panel blinking display control device C30 to control the panel blinking display device C28.

[Explanation of FIG. 233] FIG. 233 corresponds to FIG.
It is an operating procedure explanatory drawing of the panel blinking sequence data file function NP8 which reads and writes the panel blinking sequence data B14 generated or edited by the procedure of, and the operating procedure is as follows. (1) Panel blink sequence data B1 from main memory
4 is read and written in the panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b. (2) The panel blinking sequence data B14 is read from the panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b and written in the main storage device.

[Explanation of FIG. 234] FIG. 234 shows a blinking display execution control function N for blinking the panel blinking display device C28.
FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of an operation procedure of P7, in which the blinking time-series data B11 written in the main storage device according to the procedure of FIG. It is converted into blinking display device control data B16 and output to the panel blinking display control device C30 which controls the panel blinking display device C28. The panel blinking display device C28 described above is a blinking display device in which a plurality of actual blinking display units (for example, one light bulb) are collected.

[Explanation of FIG. 235] FIG. 235 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of the print function NP9. The panel blinking sequence data B14 or the panel blinking display device control data B16 written in the main memory by the procedure of FIG. ,
It has a function of printing in the printing device C17 and a function of storing in the auxiliary storage device (panel blink sequence data storage device C11b) in a printing format.

[Explanation of FIG. 236] FIG. 236 shows a hard copy function NP1 for copying the image data B10d of the edit screen displayed on the screen to the hard copy device C19.
It is operation procedure explanatory drawing of 0.

[Explanation of FIG. 237] FIG. 237 shows the first embodiment of the blinking display panel C33 and the panel blinking display device control data B16 of the panel blinking display device C28.
FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram of a blinking unit light source of a blinking display panel and a memory configuration diagram of a main storage device corresponding to the blinking unit light source configuration diagram. The blinking display panel C33 shown in the figure has seven blinking unit light sources C32 arranged in each column in the vertical direction and 31 blinking unit light sources in each row in the horizontal direction, and the main storage device corresponding to this blinking display panel C33 is 7 in each column in the direction and 31 in each row in the horizontal direction
Memory is allocated.

[Explanation of FIG. 238] FIG. 238 shows a display graphic corresponding to the graphic drawing (character [ABCDE]) of FIG.
FIG. 28 is a blinking unit light source data explanatory diagram for explaining blinking unit light source data (hereinafter referred to as dot data) B27 for blinking display on the blinking display panel C33 of the first example of FIG. 237.

[2661] In FIG. 26A, the numeral "1" in the first column
The letters "A" to "5" indicate unit numbers, and the letters "A" to "E" in the second column indicate the display graphic B21 of each unit. The reference point indicates the position where the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by each display figure is arranged. For example, the reference point (2, 1) of the display figure “A” indicates the position where the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by the display figure “A” is arranged in the first row and the second column. The placement position of the reference point can be interactively designated or changed. The size indicates the size of the rectangle occupied by each display figure. For example, as for the size (7, 5) of the display figure “A”, the size of the rectangle occupied by the display figure “A” is 7 rows and 5 columns, as shown in FIG. Indicates that. The dot data B27 is data for blinking the blinking unit light source C32 of each display figure.

In FIG. 2B, the rectangular pattern occupied by each display figure represents the dot data B27 of each display figure. For example, the rectangular pattern occupied by the display figure “A” is the dot data of the display figure “A” (00100,01010,10001,1000
1,11111,10001,10001).

[Explanation of FIG. 239] FIG.
6 is a time-series lighting memory diagram of a blinking display panel of the main storage device for outputting dot data B27 of the blinking unit light source data explanatory diagram for each scene to turn on the blinking unit light source C32 in a predetermined color.

FIG. 267 is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory diagram of the main storage device when there is lighting color data B28. The numbers 1 to 12 in the vertical margin indicate the scene number and the horizontal margin. The numbers 1 to 8 indicate the unit numbers, and the lighting states are as follows.

[2672] The memory of the scene 1 is shown in FIG.
As in the scene 1 of 1., the data for turning off all the display figures B21 is written. In the memory of the scene 2, data for lighting only the display figure “A” with the color number 1 of the lighting color data B28 is written. In the memory of scene 3,
Data for writing the display figures "A" and "B" with color number 2 is written. Hereinafter, in the same manner, data for lighting the display figures “A” to “E” with the color number 5 is written in the memory of the scene 6.

[2673] Next, the data for turning off all the display figures B21 is written in the memory of the scene 7. In the memory of the scene 8, as in the scene 8 of FIG. 241, which will be described later, data for lighting only the display figure “A” with the color number 1 is written. In the memory of the scene 9, data for lighting only the display figure “B” with the color number 2 is written. Thereafter, in the same manner, data for lighting only the display figure “E” with color number 5 is written in the memory of the scene 12.

[Description of FIG. 240] [240] FIG.
In order to display the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing (character [ABCDE]) in FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel C33 shown in FIG.
FIG. 39 is a time series additional lighting diagram of the blinking display panel in which the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on by the lighting color data B28 for each scene in FIG. 239.

[2681] The blinking display panel C33 of scene 1 does not light the blinking unit light source C32 of any display figure.
On the blinking display panel of scene 2, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure "A" is turned on with the color number 1. On the blinking display panel of the scene 3, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figures “A” and “B” is turned on with the color number 2. In the same way,
On the blinking display panel of the scene 6, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figures "A" to "E" is turned on with the color number 5.

[Explanation of FIG. 241] FIG. 241 shows the dot data B27 of FIG. 238 and the lighting of each scene of FIG. 239 in order to display the display graphic corresponding to the graphic drawing (character [ABCDE]) of FIG. It is a blinking display panel time-sequential lighting diagram in which a blinking unit light source C32 is turned on by color data B28.

[2691] On the blinking display panel C33 of scene 7, the blinking unit light source C32 of any display figure is not turned on.
On the blinking display panel of the scene 8, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure "A" is turned on with the color number 1. On the blinking display panel of the scene 9, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure "B" is turned on with the color number 2. Hereinafter, in the same manner, scene 12
Blinking display panel, blinking unit "C"
32 is turned on with color number 5.

[Explanation of FIG. 242] FIG. 242 shows a second embodiment of the blinking display panel C33 of the panel blinking display device C28 and the panel blinking display device control data B16,
FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram of a blinking unit light source of a blinking display panel and a memory configuration diagram of a main storage device corresponding to the blinking unit light source configuration diagram. The blinking display panel C33 shown in the figure has 16 blinking unit light sources C32 in each column in the vertical direction and 32 blinking unit light sources C32 in each row in the horizontal direction.
In the main memory device corresponding to the blinking display panel C33, 16 memories are arranged in each column in the vertical direction and 32 memories are arranged in each row in the horizontal direction.

[Explanation of FIG. 243] FIG. 243 (A) shows a blinking unit light source C32 in the blinking unit light source configuration diagram of FIG. 242.
FIG. 6 is a time-series lighting diagram of a blinking display panel of scene 1 that lights in a predetermined color. FIG. 6B shows a main memory that lights the blinking unit light source C32 in a predetermined color when there is lighting color data B28. It is a blinking display panel time series lighting memory diagram of an apparatus.

In FIG. 27A, the rectangular pattern occupied by each display figure represents the dot data B27 of scene 1.
In the same figure (A), the numbers 5, 10, 1 in the horizontal margin are shown.
5, ... Shows the blinking unit light source column number of the blinking display panel C33. The numbers 1 to 16 in the vertical margins of FIG. 1A or FIG. 3B indicate the blinking unit light source row numbers of the blinking display panel C33.

[2712] The dot data B27 written in the memory shown in the blinking display panel time series lighting memory diagram of the main storage device of FIG. (1) Data that does not turn on all the blinking unit light sources C32 in the horizontal direction is written in the memory of the dot data B27 in the first row in the horizontal direction. (2) Data for turning on the 5th, 10th, 22nd and 27th blinking unit light sources in the horizontal direction with color number 2 is written in the memory of the dot data of the second row in the horizontal direction. (3) The data for turning on the 4th, 9th, 11th, 21st, 23rd and 28th blinking unit light sources in the horizontal direction with color number 2 is written in the memory of the dot data of the third row in the horizontal direction. Be done. (4) The data for turning on the third, eighth, twelfth, twentieth, twenty-fourth and twenty-ninth blinking unit light sources in the horizontal direction with color number 2 is written in the dot data memory in the fourth row in the horizontal direction. Be done. (5) The memory for the dot data in the fifth column in the horizontal direction has data for turning on the 2nd, 7th, 13th, 19th, 25th and 30th blinking unit light sources in the horizontal direction with color number 2. Written. The description is omitted below.

[Explanation of FIG. 244] FIG. 244 (A) shows a blinking unit light source C32 in the blinking unit light source configuration diagram of FIG. 242.
It is a blinking display panel time-series lighting diagram of scene 2 that lights up in a predetermined color, and FIG. 7B shows a main memory that lights up the blinking unit light source C32 in a predetermined color when there is lighting color data B28. It is a blinking display panel time series lighting memory diagram of an apparatus.

In FIG. 27A, the rectangular pattern occupied by each display figure represents the dot data B27 of scene 2.
In the same figure (A), the numbers 5, 10, 1 in the horizontal margin are shown.
5, ... Shows the blinking unit light source column number of the blinking display panel C33. The numbers 1 to 16 in the vertical margins of FIG. 1A or FIG. 3B indicate the blinking unit light source row numbers of the blinking display panel C33.

[2722] In the dot data B27 of FIG. 19A and the blinking display panel time-series lighting memory diagram of FIG.
The same data as in FIG. 243 is written in the dot data memory for the four rows from the top (first to fourth rows in the horizontal direction), but in the memory for the dot data in the fifth row in the horizontal direction. Indicates the second, seventh, thirteenth, nineteenth to twenty-fifth and thirtyth blinking unit light sources C32 in the horizontal direction as color number 2
The data to be turned on is written. The description is omitted below.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 243 and 244 described above, the case where the display figure B21 displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 is displayed by the dot data B27 of two scenes, scene 1 and scene 2, will be described. However, the number of scenes can be increased to 3 or more, and the blinking unit light source C32 can be turned on by the dot data B27 of 3 or more scenes.

[Explanation of FIG. 245] FIG. 245 corresponds to FIG.
Using the same blinking display panel C33 as
It is a 3rd Example of the panel blinking display apparatus control data B16 which moves 1 and is a blinking unit light source block diagram of a blinking display panel, and the memory block diagram of the main memory device corresponding to this blinking unit light source block diagram. Blinking display panel C shown in FIG.
33, seven blinking unit light sources C32 are arranged in each column in the vertical direction and 31 blinking unit light sources C32 in each row in the horizontal direction, and the main storage device corresponding to this blinking display panel C33 is seven in each column in the vertical direction. Thus, 31 memories are arranged in each row in the horizontal direction.

[Explanation of FIG. 246] FIG. 246 shows a display figure corresponding to the figure drawing (character [ABCDE]) of FIG.
It is a blinking unit light source data explanatory drawing explaining the dot data (blinking unit light source data) B27 for blinking while moving on the blinking display panel C33 of the 3rd Example of FIG. 245.

[2742] In the same figure (A), the number "1" in the first column
The letters "A" to "5" indicate unit numbers, and the letters "A" to "E" in the second column indicate the display graphic B21 of each unit. The reference point is the scene 5 of FIG.
The position where the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by each display figure is arranged when the blinking unit light source C32 of the plurality of display figures B21 is lit on the blinking display panel C33 is shown. For example, the reference point (2, 1) of the display figure “A” indicates that the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by the display figure “A” is arranged in the first row and the second column. This reference point moves as the scene changes over time. The size indicates the size of the rectangle occupied by each display figure. For example, as for the size (7, 5) of the display figure “A”, the size of the rectangle occupied by the display figure “A” is in a range of 7 rows and 5 columns, as shown in FIG. Indicates that. The dot data B27 is data for blinking the blinking unit light source C32 of each display figure.

In FIG. 27B, the rectangular pattern occupied by each display figure represents the dot data B27 of each display figure. For example, the rectangular pattern occupied by the display figure “A” is the dot data of the display figure “A” (00100,01010,10001,1000
1,11111,10001,10001).

[Explanation of FIG. 247] FIG.
6 is a time-series lighting memory diagram of a blinking display panel of the main storage device for outputting dot data B27 of the blinking unit light source data explanatory diagram for each scene to turn on the blinking unit light source C32 in a predetermined color.

[2751] This figure is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory diagram of the main storage device when there is lighting color data B28. The vertical marginal numbers indicate the scene numbers, and the horizontal marginal numbers indicate the scene numbers. The unit number is shown and the lighting state is as follows.

[2752] Scene 1 has a memory shown in FIG.
Data for lighting the display figure "A" of No. 1 with the color number 1 of the lighting color data B28 is written. In the memory of the scene 2, in addition to lighting the display graphic “A”, data for lighting the display graphic “B” with the color number 2 is written. Thereafter, in the same manner, in addition to the lighting of the display figures “A” to “D”, the data for turning on the display figure “E” of the unit 5 with the color number 5 is similarly written in the memory of the scene 5.

[2753] In the memory of the scene 6 of FIG. 250, which will be described later, the display graphic “A” is deleted from the lighting state of the display graphics “A” to “E” of the scene 5 of FIG. 249, and the display graphic “B” is deleted. Data for turning on "E" is written.
Data for erasing the display figure “B” and lighting the display figures “C” to “E” is written in the memory of the scene 7 from the lighting state of the display figures “B” to “E” of the scene 6. . Thereafter, similarly, in the memory of the scene 9, the display figure “D” of the unit 4 is erased from the lighting state of the display figures “D” and “E” of the scene 8, and the display figure “E” of the unit 5 is deleted. Data for writing only "" is written. In the memory of the scene 10, data for deleting the display figure “E” and turning off all the display figures B21 from the lighting state of the display figure “E” of the scene 9 is written.

[Explanation of FIG. 248] FIG. 248 corresponds to FIG.
The dot data B27 for causing the blinking display while moving the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing (character [ABCDE]) of FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel C33 of the third embodiment.
It is a movement mode parameter explanatory drawing which edits.

[2761] The parameters shown in the movement mode parameter explanatory diagram of FIG. 248 are as follows. (1) The lighting start position is a parameter for setting the position where the display graphic starts lighting when the predetermined position of each display graphic moves. In the following embodiment, the predetermined position of each display figure is defined as the position of the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by each display figure (the position of the first column in the vertical direction and the first line in the horizontal direction of FIG. 238 (B) described above). Position). In FIG. 249, the lighting start position (26, 1) indicates that the upper left corner of the rectangle occupied by each of the display figures “A” to “E” starts lighting from the position of the 26th column of the first row. The lighting start position is
It can be specified or changed interactively. (2) The whole divided movement mode is a parameter for setting whether the whole display figure displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 is moved at the same time or divided. In FIG. 249, the whole division movement mode (1) indicates that the entire display figure is moved at the same time. A plurality of divided movement modes are set as the whole divided movement modes, and they can be interactively selected.

[311] (3) The moving direction is a parameter for setting the moving direction of each display figure vertically and horizontally. FIG. 249
In, the moving direction (0, 0, 1, 0) indicates that each display figure moves only to the left. Each value of this item can be specified interactively. (4) The movement unit is a parameter for setting how many rows and columns each display figure moves vertically and horizontally. In FIG. 249, the movement unit (0, 0, 1, 0) indicates that each display figure moves one column to the left. Each value of this item is
Can be specified interactively. (5) Scene transition is a parameter for setting the scene transition when the display figure moves vertically and horizontally in rows and columns. In FIG. 249, a scene transition (0,
0, 6, 0) indicates that the scene is to be shifted when each display figure moves to the left by 6 columns. Each value of this item can be specified interactively.

[Explanation of FIG. 249] FIG.
In order to add the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing (character [ABCDE]) in FIG. 2 to the blinking display panel C33 shown in the third embodiment while moving it for each character while moving it for each column. Then, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on by the dot data B27 of FIG. 246 and the lighting color data B28 of each scene of FIG. 247.

[2781] As shown in scenes 1 to 5 in the figure, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the display figure B21 displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 is moved to sequentially turn on the display figure. Let

[2782] The lighting start position of FIG.
6, 1), the dot data in the memory of the display figure “A” of scene 1 in FIG.
From the position of the 26th column of the 1st row of 3, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure “A” is turned on with the color number 1. Similarly, in the dot data of the memory of the scene 2 of FIG. 249, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure “B” is turned on with the color number 2 at this lighting start position. When the display figure "B" moves to the lighting start position, the display figure "A" also moves leftward by 6 dots for one unit.

[2785] Thereafter, similarly, the dot data of the memory of the scene 5 in FIG. 249 is the lighting start position (26, 1).
Then, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure "E" is turned on with the color number 5. When the display figure "E" moves to the lighting start position, the display figures "A" to "D" also move to the left by 6 dots for one unit. At this time, the display figures "A" to "E" are displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33.

[Explanation of FIG. 250] FIG.
In order to erase the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing (letter [ABCDE]) of FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel C33 shown in the third embodiment while moving it by each column of each letter, The dot data B27 of FIG. 246 and FIG.
7 is a time series erasing lighting diagram of a display panel in which a blinking unit light source is turned on by lighting color data B28 for each scene of FIG.

[2791] Scene 5 in FIG. 249 and Scene 6 in FIG. 250
In between, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the display graphics "B" to "E" displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 are moved and the display graphics "A" is erased.

[2792] The dot data of the memory of the scene 6 in FIG. 250 is the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figures “B” to “E”.
Light up. Between scene 6 and scene 7 in FIG. 250, the blinking unit is set so as to erase the display figure “B” while moving the display figures “C” to “E” displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33. The light source C32 is turned on.

[2793] The dot data in the memory of scene 7 in FIG. 250 is the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figures "C" to "E".
Light up. Between the scene 7 and the scene 8 in FIG. 250, the display figures “D” and “E” displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 are moved so that the display figure “C” is erased. The light source C32 is turned on.

[2795] Thereafter, similarly, in the dot data of the memory of the scene 9 in FIG. 250, the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure "E" is turned on with the color number 5. Subsequently, the display figure "E" also moves to the left and is erased from the display range of the blinking display panel C33. For the dot data in the memory of the scene 10, all the blinking unit light sources C32 are turned off.

[2800] [Explanation of FIGS. 251 and 252] FIG.
Is a display panel time series in which the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on in order to move the display figure “A” in each column between time 1 and time 6 from scene 1 to immediately before scene 2 in FIG. 249. It is an additional lighting figure.

[2802] In the figure, the display figure "A" of scene 1 is displayed.
From when is displayed until immediately before the display figure “B” of scene 2 is displayed (time 1 to time 6 of scene 1)
Then, the display figure "A" moves one column to the left,
Since the lighting start position of FIG. 248 is set to (26, 1), the display figure “B” of scene 2 is not displayed.

FIG. 252 shows a blinking unit light source in order to move the display figures “A” and “B” row by row between time 1 to time 6 from scene 2 to immediately before scene 3 in FIG. 249. FIG. 8 is a time-series additional lighting diagram of a display panel in which is illuminated.

[2805] In the same figure, the display figure "A" of scene 2 is displayed.
From the time 1 when "B" and "B" are displayed to the time 6 immediately before the display figure "C" of scene 3 is displayed, the display figures "A" and "B" are moved one column to the left. But
Since the lighting start position of FIG. 248 is set to (26, 1), the display figure “C” of scene 3 is not displayed.

[2807] In the same manner, the display figures "C" to "E" are lit and added between time 6 of scene 2 in FIG. 252 and time 1 of scene 5 in FIG. 253.

[2809] In the above description of FIGS. 251, 252, the blinking display panel C33 is moved to the blinking display panel C33 by moving the display figure B21 corresponding to the figure drawing (letter [ABCDE]) for each column. However, the case where each character is added by lighting one by one has been described. Next, the display figure B21 displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 is displayed.
The blinking unit light source C3 so that it is erased for each column of each character
A case where 2 is turned on will be described.

[2810] [Explanation of FIG. 253] FIG.
Time 1 from Scene 5 to immediately before Scene 6 in Figure 250
During the period from time to time 6, the display panel with the blinking unit light source C32 turned on in order to erase the character "A" in each column while moving the display figures "B" to "E" in each column FIG.

[2811] The display figures in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 at time 1 in scene 5 in FIG. 253 are "A" to "E".
That is, it is the same as the display figure at time 5 in scene 5 in FIG. 249. At the time 1 of scene 5 in FIG. 253, the blinking unit light source C is set so that the first column of the first display figure “A” is located at the position of the second column in the display range of the blinking display panel C33.
32 is turned on. Subsequently, at time 2 to time 5 of scene 5 in FIG. 253, the blinking unit light source is moved so as to move the second to fifth rows of the display figure “A” one row to the left while sequentially erasing. Turn on C32. At this time, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the display figures "B" to "E" are simultaneously moved leftward one column at a time.

[2815] [Explanation of FIG. 254] FIG.
From scene 1 to just before scene 9
While moving the display figure "E" for each column,
It is a display panel time series erasing lighting diagram in which a blinking unit light source is turned on in order to erase the character “D” in each column.

[2816] The display graphic of the display range of the blinking display panel C33 at time 1 in scene 8 in FIG. 254 is "D" and "E".
And so that the first column of the first display figure “D” is positioned at the second column of the display range of the blinking display panel C33,
The blinking unit light source C32 is turned on. Subsequently, at time 2 to time 5 of scene 8 in the figure, the blinking unit light source is moved so that the second to fifth columns of the display figure “D” are sequentially erased and moved to the left one by one. Turn on C32. At this time, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the display figure "E" is also moved leftward one column at a time.

[2820] [Explanation of FIG. 255] FIG.
In order to erase the character “E” in each column between time 1 to time 6 from the scene 9 to the scene 10 immediately before,
It is a display panel time series erasing lighting diagram in which a blinking unit light source is turned on.

[2825] The display figure in the display range of the blinking display panel C33 at time 1 in scene 9 in FIG. 255 is "E",
The blinking unit light source C3 is set so that the first row of the display figure “E” is located at the position of the second row in the display range of the blinking display panel C33.
Turn on 2. Subsequently, at time 2 to time 5 of scene 9 in the same figure, the blinking unit light source is moved so that the second to fifth columns of the display figure "E" are sequentially erased and moved one column to the left. Turn on C32.

[2826] The next lighting state of scene 9 in FIG. 255, which is not shown, at time 6 is the same state as in scene 10 in FIG. 250, and all display figures are erased from the display range of the blinking display panel C33. , All the blinking unit light sources C32 are turned off.

[2830] In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the scene transition parameter of FIG. 248 is set to (0,
0, 6, 0), so when the display figure moves to the left by 6 columns (one unit), the scene shifts and the display figure B21 of the blinking display panel C33 lights up for each unit. The case of starting is explained.
When the display figure is visually recognized for each character (one unit) such as a character, as shown in the embodiments of FIGS. 249 and 250, it is appropriate to start lighting the display figure for each unit. Is.

[2831] However, when visually recognizing a continuous movement like a moving train figure, it is appropriate to make the blinking display panel C33 continuously turn on the display figure. . When the display figure is continuously illuminated and moved, the lighting start state of the lower six times is inserted between the scenes of FIGS. 249 and 250 so that the display figure B21 is continuously illuminated and moved. can do. In order to facilitate the comparison between the method of lighting the display graphic for each unit and the method of continuously lighting the display graphic, a blinking display panel C33 will be described with reference to FIGS. 249, 256 and 257. A case where the display figure B21 is continuously turned on and moved will be described.

[Explanation of FIG. 256] In FIG. 256, the display figure “A” is displayed as a character between the time 1 to the time 6 from the start of lighting the first column of the display figure “A” to the scene 1 in FIG. 249. FIG. 9 is a time-series additional lighting diagram of the display panel in which the blinking unit light source is turned on in order to add lighting for each column and display it while moving.

[2842] Using FIG. 249 and FIG. 256 described above, the display figure B21 corresponding to the figure drawing (character [ABCDE]) in FIG. 2 is moved to the blinking display panel C33 for each column of each character. However, an embodiment will be described in which the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the lighting is added for each column of the display figure.

[2845] In FIG. 256, if the lighting start position in FIG. 248 is set to (31, 1), the blinking unit light source C32 in the first column (31st column at time 1) of the first display figure “A” is set. Turn on with color number 1. Then, time 2 in the figure
From the second column to the fifth column of the display figure “A” at time to 6
The blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so as to move one column to the left while adding and turning on the columns sequentially. Note that, also in FIG. 256, since the scene transition parameter of FIG. 248, which is the same as that of FIG. 249, is set to (0, 0, 6, 0), the scene is displayed when the display figure “A” moves to the left by six columns. Then, as will be described later, the next display figure “B” starts lighting from the first column.

[2850] [Explanation of FIG. 257] FIG.
In order to add the lighting of the display figure “B” for each column of characters during the time 1 to the time 6 from the lighting state of the next time of the scene 1 to the scene 2 and display the lighting while moving. FIG. 7 is a time series additional lighting diagram of a display panel in which a blinking unit light source is turned on.

At time 1 in FIG. 257, the dot data of the first column (31st column of the display range) of the first display figure “B” is the same as the blinking unit light source C32 of the display figure “B” with the color number 2.
Turn on. Subsequently, from time 2 to time 6 in the same figure, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so that the second to fifth columns of the display figure “B” are sequentially turned on and moved one column to the left while being added. Let At this time, display figure "A"
Also, at the same time, the blinking unit light source C32 is turned on so as to move to the left one row at a time. Since the same applies to the following, the description is omitted.

[2860] Also, the display figures "B" to "E" are moved row by row, the character "A" is deleted row by row, and then the display figures "C" to "E" are lined up. While moving each row, delete the letter "B" row by row.
Similarly, the description of the lighting state of the blinking unit light source for erasing the character “E” for each column will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 255 described above.
Since it is the same as the explanation of, the explanation is omitted.

[Effect of Panel Blinking Display Device Controlling Method] The effects of the panel blinking display device controlling method of the present invention are as follows. (1) By displaying the blinking time-series data B11 on the display of the computer, it is possible to re-edit efficiently and easily without consuming the image material. (2) Sequence program storage medium C as an aggregate by the panel blink sequence data editing function NP5
Panel flashing sequence data B14 divided into a plurality of data for storage in a plurality of chips forming 24.
Can be generated interactively, efficiently, and easily without consuming art materials. (3) The blinking display execution control function NP7 causes the blinking time-series data B11 to perform blinking such as a blinking repetition portion of the panel blinking display device C28 (of the actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions, a pause, etc. It is possible to interactively and efficiently and easily edit the panel blinking display device control data B16 divided into. (4) This edited panel blinking display device control data B1
6 can be output to the panel blinking display control device C30 to efficiently and easily blink the panel blinking display device C28. (5) Panel blink sequence data file function NP8
The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device can be read and written in the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b) for storage without consuming the image material. Read the data stored in the device,
It can be written to the main memory and re-edited efficiently and easily.

(6) The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in this auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device and output to the sequence program generating device C23 to store the sequence program efficiently in a small storage space. It can be recorded on the medium C24. After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24, and the medium data display control device C
It is possible to control the panel blinking display device C28 by outputting to the display device 31. . (7) Panel blinking sequence data B14 or panel blinking display device control data B16 by the printing function NP9
Can be printed on the printing device C17 and visually and efficiently confirmed.

(8) The lighting start position when each display figure to be displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel starts lighting according to the movement mode parameter of FIG. 248, and the entire display figure displayed in the display range of the display figure Whole division movement mode that sets whether to move at the same time or to divide and move,
A movement direction that sets the direction in which each display figure moves up, down, left, and right, a movement unit that sets the number of display figures (number of units) in which each display figure moves up, down, left, and right. At this time, it is possible to interactively easily specify or change a scene shift parameter or the like for setting whether or not to shift the scene. (9) When the display figure is visually recognized for each character (one unit) such as a character, each set value of the method of lighting the display figure for each unit or the figure of the train on which the display figure moves As described above, when visually recognizing a continuous movement, it is possible to interactively easily specify or change each set value of the method of continuously moving and lighting the display graphic on the blinking display panel.

[Effect of Device Control Method of Combination of Panel Blinking Display and Graphic Blinking Display] The effects of the device control method of the combination of the panel blinking display and the graphic blinking display of the present invention are as follows. (1) The panel blinking display device control method and the graphic blinking display device control method of the present invention share the same data or partially different data, and are individually generated and edited individually.
Since it can be recorded, executed, etc., it is efficient and the work is simple.

[3000]

[Effect of the present invention]

6. Effect of NCAD processing step 6.1 Effect of method for generating and editing image The effect of the method for generating and editing image data of the present invention is as follows.
It is as follows. (1) Image input device C using the image input function NC1
In the method of inputting the physical pattern information B03 by 04 to generate the image data B10, the predetermined logo mark or the pattern (draft) created by the designer can be input to the computer at high speed and easily. (2) The input image data B10a is input by the input image data interface NC2 to obtain the image data B10.
In the method of generating, the existing CG data can be input to the computer quickly and easily. (3) Using the paint function NC3, the coordinate data of the design B02 is input by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the image data B10. The data B10 can be generated. (4) Painting function The method of editing the image data B10 by the editing function of the NC3 can easily and easily modify and change the design. (5) The method of generating the image data B10 from the coordinate graphic data by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function is as follows.
It is possible to quickly and easily generate the image data B10 and edit the image data B10.

6.2 (Blinking Unit) Effect of Method for Generating and Editing Coordinate / Graphic Data The effect of the method for generating and editing coordinate graphic data and the blinking unit coordinate / graphic data of the present invention is as follows. (1) A method of inputting input coordinate graphic data B06a (existing CAD data) and generating output coordinate graphic data B06b by the input coordinate graphic data interface NC4 is to generate coordinate graphic data B06 easily at high speed. You can (2) CAD function The coordinate figure drawing function of the NC5 is used to input coordinate data of the design B02 by the coordinate input device C01 to generate the coordinate figure data B06, by interactively and quickly and easily. Data B06 can be generated. (3) CAD function By the image overlap coordinate figure generation function of NC5, the contour of the image data B10 is traced, and the coordinate figure data B0 can be interactively and efficiently and easily.
6 can be generated. (4) Image data B10 is generated from the coordinate graphic data B06b by the coordinate graphic overlap image generation function, this image data B10 is edited, and the edited output coordinate graphic data B06b is edited again from this edited image data B10. Can be generated. Therefore, even the output coordinate graphic data B06b once created can be returned to an image and the design can be easily modified and changed. (5) CAD Function The method of editing the coordinate graphic data B06 by the coordinate graphic editing function of the NC 5 can interactively and efficiently and easily edit. (6) By the blinking unitization function of the CAD function, the output coordinate figure data B06b to the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08
In the method of generating, the blinking time series data B11 can be generated at high speed and easily from the generated blinking unit coordinate figure data B08.

6.3 Effects of method of recording image data and coordinate graphic data The effects of the method of recording image data and coordinate graphic data of the present invention are as follows. (1) With the file function NC7, the output image data B10b can be efficiently and easily recorded in the image storage device C05 without consuming the image material, and the storage space can be reduced. (2) With the file function NC7, output coordinate graphic data B06b can be efficiently and easily performed without consuming an image material.
Can be recorded in the coordinate figure storage device C02, and the storage space can be reduced. (3) By the file function NC7, the blinking unit coordinate figure data B08 can be efficiently and easily used without consuming the image material.
Can be recorded in the blinking unit coordinate figure data storage device C07, and the storage space can be reduced. (4) The stored image data or coordinate graphic data can be read and edited efficiently and easily without consuming an image material. (5) By reading the stored image data or coordinate graphic data, another image or coordinate graphic data can be efficiently and easily generated from these images or coordinate graphic data without consuming an image material.

6.4 Effect of Output Method of Image Data and Coordinate Graphic Data The effect of the output method of image data and coordinate graphic data of the present invention is as follows. (1) As for the image output method, it is possible to efficiently and easily draw the output image data B10b by the drawing device (plotter) C18 using the drawing output function NC9 and easily visually confirm it. (2) The printing method NC10 is used to output the coordinate graphic data.
To output the output coordinate figure data B0 efficiently and easily.
6b is printed by a printer (printer) C17,
It can be easily visually confirmed. (3) The image data output method is the hard copy function NC
11, the output image data B10b can be efficiently and easily copied by the hard copy device C19 and visually confirmed. (4) The output method of coordinate graphic data is not only to print the output coordinate graphic data directly to the printer, but also to save and save the print data in the auxiliary storage device in a print format in a small storage space so that it can be promptly and later saved. Easy to read and reuse.

[3040] 7. Effect of NRGS processing step 7.1 Effect of method for generating blinking time-series data The effect of the method for generating blinking time-series data of the present invention is as follows. (1) The blinking unitized data B07 can be input interactively with a computer, and the blinking time-series data B11 can be generated interactively efficiently and easily without the need for an art material. (2) The blinking state of the generated blinking time series data B11 is
It is possible to check efficiently and easily by the screen display of the computer without the need for an art material. (3) The generated blinking time series data B11 is printed by the print function N.
By printing using R10, it is possible to easily visually confirm the blinking state. (4) The generated blinking time-series data B11 is edited by the blinking time-series transmission data editing function NR5 into the blinking time-series transmission data B12 necessary for executing the simulation display, and further, the blinking time-series transmission data file function NR8 or communication The function NR9 allows efficient and easy transmission.

7.2 Effects of method for editing blinking time-series data The effects of the method for editing blinking time-series data of the present invention are as follows. The generated blinking time-series data B11 can be efficiently and easily edited without consuming an image material by an interactive form with a computer.

7.3 Method of Recording Blinking Time-series Data The method of recording blinking time-series data of the present invention easily electronically records the generated or edited blinking time-series data B11.
Furthermore, it can be easily regenerated and modified without the need for additional painting materials.

7.4 Effects of Printing Method of Blinking Time Series Data The effects of the printing method of blinking time series data of the present invention are as follows. (1) The time series change of the blinking time series data displayed by the blinking time series data B11 can be printed on the printing device (printer) C17 using the printing function NR10 and easily visually confirmed. it can. (2) In addition to directly printing on the printing device, it can be stored in the main storage device or the auxiliary storage device in a printing format and can be printed easily when necessary. (3) It is possible to specify printing styles such as printing paper of various sizes and partial printing. (4) The print range can be interactively specified on the screen. (5) The display state displayed on the screen is processed into edit screen image data B10d by the hard copy function NR11, and the edit screen image data B10d processed into this hard copy format data is hard copied and visually checked. It can be easily confirmed.

[3080] 8. Effects of Execution Method of Simulation Display and Blinking Display 8.1 Effects of NGEN and NDSP Processing Steps (Method of Execution of Simulation Display) The effects of the execution method of simulation display of the present invention are as follows. (1) It can be efficiently and easily displayed on the display of a computer without consuming an image material. (2) The blinking state can be easily confirmed visually by displaying a simulation on the computer display. (3) By using the two computers, one computer can generate or edit the blinking time series data B11, and the simulation display can be immediately (in real time) displayed on the display of the other computer. (4) Even when there is only one computer, after the blinking time series transmission data B12 is stored in the auxiliary storage device by the blinking time series transmission data file function NR8,
Time series graphic display program E0 in NDSP processing step
By starting 5 and executing the simulation display, the blinking state can be visually checked.

8.2 Effects of Graphic Flashing Display Device Control Method The effects of the graphic flashing display device control method of the present invention are as follows. (1) By displaying the blinking time-series data B11 on the display of the computer, it is possible to re-edit efficiently and easily without consuming the image material. (2) The sequence program storage medium C2 as an aggregate by the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5
4, the figure blinking sequence data B13 divided into a plurality of data to be stored in a plurality of chips forming 4
It can be generated interactively, efficiently and easily without consuming art materials. (3) By the blinking display execution control function NS7, the blinking time-series data B11 is changed to the blinking repeated portion of the figure blinking display device C27 (in the actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions,
It is possible to interactively and efficiently and easily edit the graphic blinking display device control data B15 divided into blinking display units to be blinked such as temporarily stopped. (4) This edited figure blinking display device control data B15
Is output to the graphic blinking display control device C29, and the graphic blinking display device C27 can be blinked efficiently and easily. (5) The figure blinking sequence data file function NS8 reads the figure blinking sequence data B13 stored in the main storage device and writes it to the auxiliary storage device (the figure blinking sequence data storage device C11a) without consuming the image material. The data stored in the auxiliary storage device can be read and written in the main storage device for efficient and easy reediting.

(6) The graphic blinking sequence data B13 stored in this auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device and output to the sequence program generating device C23, so that the sequence program can be stored efficiently in a small storage space. It can be recorded on the medium C24. After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24, and the medium data display control device C3 is read.
1 to control the graphic blinking display device C27. (7) By the printing function NS9, the graphic blinking sequence data B13 or the graphic blinking display device control data B16 can be printed on the printing device C17 and efficiently and easily visually confirmed.

8.3 Effects of Panel Blinking Display Device Control Method The effects of the panel blinking display device control method of the present invention are as follows. (1) By displaying the blinking time-series data B11 on the display of the computer, it is possible to re-edit efficiently and easily without consuming the image material. (2) Sequence program storage medium C as an aggregate by the panel blink sequence data editing function NP5
Panel flashing sequence data B14 divided into a plurality of data for storage in a plurality of chips forming 24.
Can be generated interactively, efficiently, and easily without consuming art materials. (3) The blinking display execution control function NP7 causes the blinking time-series data B11 to perform blinking such as a blinking repetition portion of the panel blinking display device C28 (of the actual blinking display unit), the number of repetitions, a pause, etc. It is possible to interactively and efficiently and easily edit the panel blinking display device control data B16 divided into. (4) This edited panel blinking display device control data B1
6 can be output to the panel blinking display control device C30 to efficiently and easily blink the panel blinking display device C28. (5) Panel blink sequence data file function NP8
The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the main storage device can be read and written in the auxiliary storage device (panel blinking sequence data storage device C11b) for storage without consuming the image material. Read the data stored in the device,
It can be written to the main memory and re-edited efficiently and easily.

(6) The panel blinking sequence data B14 stored in the auxiliary storage device is read from the auxiliary storage device and output to the sequence program generating device C23 to store the sequence program efficiently in a small storage space. It can be recorded on the medium C24. After that, the sequence program is read from the sequence program storage medium C24, and the medium data display control device C
It is possible to control the panel blinking display device C28 by outputting to the display device 31. . (7) Panel blinking sequence data B14 or panel blinking display device control data B16 by the printing function NP9
Can be printed on the printing device C17 and visually and efficiently confirmed.

(8) Using the movement mode parameters shown in FIG. 248, the lighting start position when each display figure displayed in the display range of the blinking display panel starts lighting, and the entire display figure displayed in the display range of the display figure Whole division movement mode that sets whether to move at the same time or to divide and move,
A movement direction that sets the direction in which each display figure moves up, down, left, and right, a movement unit that sets the number of display figures (number of units) in which each display figure moves up, down, left, and right. At this time, it is possible to interactively easily specify or change a scene shift parameter or the like for setting whether or not to shift the scene. (9) When the display figure is visually recognized for each character (one unit) such as a character, each set value of the method of lighting the display figure for each unit or the figure of the train on which the display figure moves As described above, when visually recognizing continuous movement lighting, each set value of the method of continuously moving the display graphic can be easily specified or changed interactively on the blinking display panel.

[Brief description of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a computer main body and an input / output / external storage device for normal data processing.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a graphic drawing for explaining a display control method according to the related art and the present invention.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing image data generated in a main storage device from design or physical design information or input image data of the prior art, displayed on a display, edited, and stored in the image storage device and hardware; FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of image generation to be copied to a copying apparatus. FIG. 1B shows coordinate graphic data generated in a main storage device from a conventional design or input coordinate graphic data, displayed on a display, and edited to generate a coordinate graphic. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of coordinate figure generation for storage in a storage device and printing in a printing device.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of coordinate graphic data for explaining a display control method according to the related art and the present invention.

FIG. 5 is a prior art paint software for generating and editing image data using prior art paint software and storing the output image data in an image storage device or a hard copy device. It is an external connection functional diagram.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example in which input coordinate graphic data is input and edited using conventional CAD software, the edited output coordinate graphic data is stored in a coordinate graphic storage device, and output by a plotter device or a printing device. FIG. 7 is a functional diagram of a CAD software external connection of a conventional technique for storing a hard copy.

FIG. 7 is a process step diagram of an overall configuration used to implement the advertising medium display control method of the present invention.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a data storage area of a main storage device in each processing step.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing coordinate data of a pattern, physical pattern information,
Input coordinate figure data, coordinate figure such as input image data, and blinking unitized data (CAD attribute of the present invention) for specifying blinking unit of the figure are input, and the input coordinate figure is unitized by blinking unitized data. FIG. 7 is an NCAD external connection function diagram having a function of generating, editing, recording and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data having graphic data and blinking unitized data and output image data.

FIG. 10 is an NRGS external that inputs blinking unitized data, generates, edits, records and outputs blinking time series data, and outputs blinking time series transmission data for changing simulation display in time series. It is a connection function diagram.

FIG. 11 is an NGEN external connection function diagram for generating a time-series graphic display program for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data and displaying a simulation graphic.

FIG. 12 is a functional diagram of NDSP external connection for executing simulation display by inputting blinking time-series transmission data and a time-series graphic display program.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing blinking sequence data input by inputting blinking time-series data to record the pattern blinking display device control data for controlling the pattern blinking display device or the pattern blinking sequence data recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the pattern blinking display device. It is an NSEQ external connection functional diagram to output.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing input of blinking time-series data and blinking unit coordinate graphic data, and recording them in a panel blinking display device control data for controlling the panel blinking display device or a sequence program storage medium for controlling the panel blinking display device. It is a NSEP external connection functional diagram which outputs the panel blinking sequence data.

15 is an embodiment correspondence diagram in which processing steps are combined as necessary from the processing steps [1] to [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7.

16 is a diagram corresponding to an embodiment of the first embodiment, which is composed of the processing steps [2] and [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

FIG. 17 is an embodiment-corresponding diagram of embodiment 2 which includes processing steps [2] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

FIG. 18 is an embodiment correspondence diagram of embodiment 3 including the processing steps of [1], [2], and [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7; is there.

FIG. 19 is an embodiment correspondence diagram of embodiment 4 including the processing steps [1], [2], and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7; is there.

20 is an embodiment-corresponding diagram of embodiment 5 including processing steps [2] to [4] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

FIG. 21 is an embodiment-corresponding diagram of embodiment 6 including the processing steps [1] to [4] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

22 is an embodiment-corresponding diagram of embodiment 7 which includes processing steps [2] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

23 is an embodiment correspondence diagram of embodiment 8 which is composed of the processing steps [2] to [4] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7; is there.

24 is an embodiment-corresponding diagram of embodiment 9 which includes the processing steps [1] to [5] in the processing step diagram of the overall configuration shown in FIG. 7;

25 is an embodiment correspondence diagram of embodiment 10 including processing steps [1] to [4] and [6] in the processing step diagram of the entire configuration shown in FIG. 7; is there.

FIG. 26 shows one of the fifth to tenth embodiments.
23 is a processing step diagram of embodiment 11 in which one computer is used to transmit blinking time-series transmission data by an auxiliary storage device to execute a simulation display. FIG.

FIG. 27 shows the use of two computers
It is a processing step figure of the 12th embodiment which transmits blinking time series transmission data by a 1st communication means, and performs a simulation display.

FIG. 28 shows the use of two computers
Embodiment 1 in which blinking time-series transmission data is transmitted by the first communication means, blinking unit coordinate figure data is transmitted by the second communication means, and a simulation display is executed.
It is a process step diagram of FIG.

FIG. 29 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms 14 to 22 of the NCAD processing step for outputting the blinking unit coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 9.

FIG. 30 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms of the implementation forms 23 to 35 of the NCAD processing step for outputting the blinking unit coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 9.

31 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms of the implementation forms 36 to 41 of the NRGS processing steps for outputting the blinking time series data and the blinking time series transmission data shown in FIG. 10;

32 is a fourth embodiment of NGEN processing steps for generating the time-series graphic display program shown in FIG. 11. FIG.
It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of 2 to 44.

FIG. 33 is a diagram corresponding to the implementation forms of the implementation forms 45 to 48 of the NDSP processing steps for executing the simulation display shown in FIG. 12;

34 is an NSEQ processing step embodiment 49 to 54 for outputting the graphic blinking display device control data for controlling the graphic blinking display device shown in FIG. 13 or the graphic blinking sequence data to be recorded in the sequence program storage medium; It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment.

FIG. 35 is a fifth embodiment of the NSEP processing step of outputting the panel blinking display device control data for controlling the panel blinking display device shown in FIG. 14 or the panel blinking sequence data to be recorded in the sequence program storage medium.
It is a figure corresponding to the embodiment of 5 to 60.

36 is an NCAD upper function hierarchy diagram in which only functions are extracted from the NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9;

[Fig. 37] Fig. 37 is a CAD middle-level function hierarchy diagram showing the middle-level functions obtained by subdividing the CAD function and the numbers of the lower level hierarchical diagrams.

[Fig. 38] Fig. 38 is a system control setting function hierarchy diagram showing the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system control function and various setting functions of the CAD function and the numbers in the flowchart thereof.

[Fig. 39] Fig. 39 is a coordinate graphic drawing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate graphic drawing function of the CAD function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 40 is a hierarchical diagram of the coordinate figure selecting function showing the subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate figure selecting function of the CAD function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 41 is a coordinate graphic editing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the coordinate graphic editing function of the CAD function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 42 is a blinking unitization function hierarchy diagram (1/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitization function of the CAD function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

43 is a blinking unitization function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitization function of the CAD function similar to FIG. 42 and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

[Fig. 44] Fig. 44 is a paint middle function hierarchy diagram showing the middle function subdivided from the paint function and the numbers of the hierarchy diagrams therebelow.

FIG. 45 is a system control setting function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system control function and various setting functions of the paint function and the numbers in the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 46 is a drawing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the drawing function of the paint function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 47 is an image editing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the image editing function of the paint function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

[Fig. 48] Fig. 48 is a file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the file function and the numbers of their flowcharts.

FIG. 49 is a print function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the print function and the numbers in the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 50 is a hard copy function hierarchy diagram showing sub-functions obtained by subdividing the hard copy function and the numbers of their flowcharts.

FIG. 51 is a sub-function obtained by subdividing the image input function, the input image data interface, the input coordinate figure data interface, the screen operation function, the communication function and the drawing output function, and the input output sub-function showing the number of the flowchart. It is a hierarchy diagram.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of an operating procedure in a CAD mode of an NCAD processing step.

FIG. 53 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of a paint mode in an NCAD processing step.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the overall concept of NCAD processing steps.

55 is a flowchart for selecting a CAD mode function in the flowchart in FIG. 54;

56 is a flow chart for selecting a function in a paint mode in the flow chart of FIG. 54.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart (1/3) of initial environment reading.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart (2/3) of reading the initial environment.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart (3/3) of initial environment reading.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart of setting work in the CAD mode.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart of setting work in the paint mode.

FIG. 62 is a blinking unit coordinate figure data generation step diagram showing steps from generation of image data or coordinate figure data to blinking unit coordinate figure data in the NCAD external connection function diagram of FIG. 9;

FIG. 63 is a physical pattern information input procedure diagram for generating physical image information by inputting physical pattern information by the image input device.

FIG. 64 is an image data input procedure diagram for inputting input image data by an input image data interface to generate image data.

FIG. 65 is an image data generation procedure diagram for generating image data by the drawing function of the paint function.

FIG. 66 is a coordinate graphic data input procedure diagram for generating input coordinate graphic data by inputting the input coordinate graphic data through the input coordinate graphic data interface.

FIG. 67 is a coordinate graphic data generation procedure diagram for generating coordinate graphic data by the coordinate graphic drawing function of the CAD function.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing C output from generated output image data;
It is an image overlap coordinate figure generation procedure figure which produces | generates coordinate figure data by the image overlap coordinate figure generation function of AD function.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing C generated from the generated coordinate figure data;
It is a blinking unit coordinate figure data generation procedure figure which produces blinking unit coordinate figure data by the blinking unitizing function of AD function.

FIG. 70 is an image data generation procedure diagram for generating output image data from the generated coordinate figure data by the coordinate figure overlap image generation function of the painting function NC3.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the image input function of the paint function in the paint mode.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the drawing function of the paint function in the paint mode.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the image editing function of the paint function in the paint mode.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure drawing function of the CAD function in the CAD mode.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure selecting function of the CAD function in the CAD mode.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the coordinate figure editing function of the CAD function in the CAD mode.

77 is a flowchart (1/2) of the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function in the CAD mode. FIG.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart (2/2) of the blinking unitization function of the CAD function in the CAD mode.

FIG. 79 is a blinking unitization data diagram for making the coordinate figure data into blinking units by the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function.

FIG. 80 is a unit coordinate graphic data diagram in which unit coordinate graphic data is generated from the coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 4 by the blinking unitizing function of the CAD function and printed by the printing function.

81 is a unit coordinate graphic data explanatory diagram explaining the unit coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 80. FIG.

82 is a blinking unit coordinate graphic data list showing a list of data generated by generating blinking unit coordinate graphic data by the blinking unitizing function from the coordinate graphic data shown in FIG. 4; It is a figure.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a screen operation function.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart of a file function.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart of a print function.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a hard copy function.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the drawing output function.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart from input of physical design information to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart from input of input image data to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart from generation of image data by inputting coordinate data of a pattern to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart from input of input coordinate graphic data to generation of blinking unit coordinate graphic data.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart from generation of coordinate figure data by inputting coordinate data of a design to generation of blinking unit coordinate figure data.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a switching procedure for displaying a paint screen on a CAD screen in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 94 (A) is a flowchart of an overlap setting procedure when a paint screen is overlapped on a CAD screen, and FIG. 94 (B) is a paint screen on a CAD screen. It is a flowchart of the overlap cancellation procedure when performing.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of a switching procedure for displaying a CAD screen on a paint screen in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 96 (A) is a flowchart of an overlap setting procedure when a CAD screen is overlapped on a paint screen, and FIG. 96 (B) is a CAD screen on a paint screen. It is a flowchart of the overlap cancellation procedure when performing.

97 is an NRGS upper function hierarchy diagram in which only functions are extracted from the NRGS external connection function diagram of FIG. 10 described above.

[Fig. 98] Fig. 98 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing system functions.

FIG. 99 is a setting function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the setting function.

[Fig. 100] Fig. 100 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the screen operation function and the numbers of their flowcharts.

FIG. 101 is a blinking unitized data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unitized data file function and the numbers of the flowchart thereof.

102 is a blinking time-series data editing function hierarchy diagram (1/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data editing function and the numbers of their flowcharts. FIG.

103 is a blinking time-series data editing function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data editing function and the numbers of their flowcharts. FIG.

FIG. 104 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions that subdivide the blinking time-series data file function and the numbers of their flowcharts.

FIG. 105 is a blinking time-series transmission data editing / file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series transmission data editing function and the blinking time-series transmission data file function.

[Fig. 106] Fig. 106 is a communication function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the communication functions and the numbers in the flowchart thereof.

FIG. 107 is a print function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the print function and the numbers in the flowchart thereof.

[Fig. 108] Fig. 108 is a hard copy function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the hard copy function and the numbers of their flowcharts.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart of the overall function of an NRGS processing step.

110 is a flow chart of reading the initial environment of the NRGS processing step. FIG.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the entire setting function of the NRGS processing step.

FIG. 112 is a work procedure diagram of blinking time-series data and blinking time-series transmission data.

FIG. 113 is a screen operation procedure diagram of an NRGS processing step.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart of a screen operation procedure of an NRGS processing step.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram of a procedure for initializing blinking time series data.

FIG. 116 (A) is an explanatory diagram of an initial state of blinking time-series data, and FIG. 116 (B) is a storage explanatory diagram of the main storage device in the initial state of blinking time-series data.

117 is an explanatory diagram of a procedure for generating blinking time series data. FIG.

118 (A) is an explanatory diagram of a blinking time-series data generation process, and FIG. 118 (B) is a memory explanatory diagram of the main storage device in a blinking time-series data generation process.

FIG. 119 is a memory explanatory diagram of a memory when blinking time-series data is stored in an auxiliary storage device.

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure for editing a blinking unitized data file and blinking time-series data.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the functions of the entire blinking time-series data editing function.

[FIG. 122] FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a blink editing procedure of a blink time-series data editing function.

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram of the linear editing of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the diagonal blinking of a single unit is set and the direction from the upper left to the lower right is designated.

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram of the linear editing in which the lower right direction to the upper left direction are designated when the diagonal blinking of a single unit is set in the blinking time series data editing function.

[FIG. 125] FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram of linear editing of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the diagonal blinking of a single unit is set and the direction from the upper right to the lower left is designated.

[FIG. 126] FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram of the linear editing in which the direction from the lower left to the upper right is designated when the oblique blinking of a single unit is set in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a blinking time series data editing function in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the upper left to the lower right. It is explanatory drawing (1/2) of linear editing.

[FIG. 128] FIG. 128 specifies the blinking width when blinking a plurality of units simultaneously in the blinking time-series data editing function, and designates the blinking direction when oblique blinking is set from upper left to lower right. It is explanatory drawing (2/2) of linear editing.

[FIG. 129] FIG. 129 is a blink time series data editing function, in which the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the lower right to the upper left. It is explanatory drawing (1/2) of linear editing.

FIG. 130 is a drawing showing, in the blinking time-series data editing function, the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the left, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the lower right to the upper left. It is explanatory drawing (2/2) of linear editing.

[FIG. 131] FIG. 131 is a linear diagram in which, in the blinking time-series data editing function, the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the upper right to the lower left. It is an explanatory view (1/2) of editing.

[FIG. 132] FIG. 132 is a linear configuration in which, in the blinking time-series data editing function, the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the left, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the upper right to the lower left. It is explanatory drawing (2/2) of edit.

[FIG. 133] FIG. 133 is a linear designating the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units in the blinking time-series data editing function, and designating the blinking direction when oblique blinking is set from lower left to upper right. It is an explanatory view (1/2) of editing.

FIG. 134 is a linear diagram in which, in the blinking time-series data editing function, the blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the left direction, and the blinking direction when diagonal blinking is set is designated from the lower left to the upper right. It is explanatory drawing (2/2) of edit.

FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which a blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from upper left to lower right.

[FIG. 136] FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in the blinking time-series data editing function, in which a blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from lower left to upper right.

[FIG. 137] FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing in the blinking time-series data editing function, in which a blinking direction when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated from lower right to upper left.

138] FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram of rectangle editing of the blinking time-series data editing function in which a blinking direction when a plurality of units are blinked simultaneously is designated from upper right to lower left.

[FIG. 139] FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram of a triangular edit of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right and the blinking direction is designated from the reference point to the upper right. Is.

[FIG. 140] FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram of the triangular edit of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the left and the blinking direction is designated from the reference point to the upper left. Is.

[FIG. 141] FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram of a triangular edit of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right and the blinking direction is designated from the reference point to the lower left. Is.

[FIG. 142] FIG. 142 is a description of a triangle edit of the blinking time-series data editing function, in which the maximum blinking width when simultaneously blinking a plurality of units is designated to the right direction and the blinking direction is designated from the reference point to the lower right. It is a figure.

143] FIG. 143 is a flowchart of scene editing of the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram of editing target scene selection in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram of inserting one scene in the blinking time-series data editing function.

146] FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of inserting a plurality of scenes in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of inserting a plurality of scenes in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram of deleting one scene in the blinking time-series data editing function.

149] FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of scene copying in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of scene copying in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram of scene movement in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram of all scene unit setting for one scene in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram of scene duplication in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart of unit editing of a blinking time-series data editing function.

155] FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram of selection of an edit target unit in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram of inserting one unit in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of inserting a plurality of units in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of inserting a plurality of units in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram of unit deletion in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of unit copying in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of unit copying in the blinking time-series data editing function.

162 is an explanatory diagram of unit movement in the blinking time-series data editing function. FIG.

FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of all-unit scene setting for one unit in the blinking time-series data editing function of.

164] FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram of duplication of units in the blinking time-series data editing function.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart of the entire file function when editing blinking time-series data.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart of a reading procedure of blinking unitized data in the NRGS processing step.

FIG. 167 (A) is a flowchart of a reading procedure of blinking time series data, and FIG.
3 is a flowchart of a writing procedure of blinking time-series data.

FIG. 168 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of reading and editing (or re-editing) the blinking time-series data generated (or edited) and stored by the procedure of FIG. 120.

169] FIG. 169 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of a blinking time-series transmission data editing function and a blinking time-series transmission data file function.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of the first communication unit.

[FIG. 171] FIG. 171 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram when one computer is used and a communication unit is not used.

[FIG. 172] FIG. 172 is a flowchart of a first example of a transmission procedure of blinking time-series transmission data.

[FIG. 173] FIG. 173 is a flowchart of a second example of a transmission procedure of blinking time-series transmission data.

174] FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram of an operating procedure of a printing function of blinking time-series data.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart of a print function for printing blinking time-series data.

[FIG. 176] FIG. 176 is a flowchart of a hard copy function for recording edit screen image data.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart of a print setting procedure of blinking time-series data of.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart of a printing operation procedure of blinking time-series data of.

[FIG. 179] FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram (1/2) of a printing method of printing by directly designating a printing range of blinking time-series data on a screen.

FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram (2/2) of the printing method of printing by directly designating the printing range of the blinking time series data on the screen.

FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram of a printing procedure of edited blinking time-series data.

182 is a diagram showing items for which printing can be designated when printing is performed by the printing method of FIG. 181.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a print example of blinking time-series data capable of printing the generated or edited blinking time-series data on one A4 sheet.

184] FIG. 184 is a generated or edited A4 sheet 1
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a first page of a print example in which blinking time-series data of a size that cannot be printed on one sheet is divided and printed on four A4 sheets.

FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating a generated or edited A4 sheet 1;
It is a figure which shows the 2nd page of the example of printing which divided and printed the blinking time series data of the size which cannot be printed on a sheet into 4 sheets of A4 paper.

186] FIG. 186 is a generated or edited A4 sheet 1
It is a figure which shows the 3rd page of the example of printing which divided the blinking time series data of the size which cannot be printed on a sheet into 4 A4 sheets, and printed it.

187] FIG. 187 shows a generated or edited A4 sheet 1
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a fourth page of a printing example in which blinking time-series data of a size that cannot be printed on one sheet is divided and printed on four A4 sheets.

[FIG. 188] FIG. 188 is an explanatory view of a hard copy procedure for performing a hard copy of image data of an edit screen displayed on the screen.

FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining blinking time-series transmission data.

190 is a functional hierarchy diagram of NGEN processing steps for generating the time-series graphic display program shown in FIG. 11. FIG.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart of the overall function of the NGEN processing steps of the present invention.

192 is a functional hierarchy diagram of the simulation display control program NDSP processing step shown in FIG. 12;

FIG. 193 is an NDSP main memory device data area diagram showing a data area of the main memory device in an NDSP processing step;

FIG. 194 (A) is a program NDS for opening / closing a blinking time series transmission data file, starting / ending communication, and activating a time series graphic display program.
FIG. 194 (B) is a flowchart of execution of the time-series graphic display program for generating the screen display RGB data and writing the same in the main storage device.

[FIG. 195] FIG. 195 is a flowchart of a procedure for reading data for one scene of blinking time-series transmission data.

[FIG. 196] FIG. 196 is a flow chart of a procedure for determining the data of each unit for each scene of the time-series graphic display program written in the main storage device and simulating the display graphic of each unit.

FIG. 197 is an explanatory diagram of a simulation display procedure for displaying screen display RGB data on a simulation display execution device.

FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining a hard copy procedure for performing a hard copy of image data of an edit screen displayed on the screen or RGB data for screen display.

[FIG. 199] FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of a video storage procedure of screen display RGB data of an edit screen.

200 is an NSEQ upper functional hierarchy diagram in which only the functions are extracted from the NSEQ external connection functional diagram of FIG. 13 described above.

201 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system function NS1. FIG.

FIG. 202 is a setting function NS2 for setting each condition at the time of editing the figure blinking sequence data and executing the figure blinking display;
FIG. 3 is a hierarchical diagram of setting functions that are subdivided.

FIG. 203 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data file function NS3.

FIG. 204 is a figure blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (1/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5.

205 is a figure blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the figure blinking sequence data editing function NS5. FIG.

[Fig. 206] Fig. 206 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the screen operation function NS6.

207] FIG. 207 is a blinking display execution control function NS7.
It is a blinking display execution control function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions that have been subdivided.

[Fig. 208] Fig. 208 is a function diagram of a figure blinking sequence data file function showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the figure blinking sequence data file function NS8.

[FIG. 209] FIG. 209 is a printing function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions that are subdivided into a printing function NS9 for printing graphic blinking sequence data or graphic blinking display device control data on a printer or outputting to a file.

FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure from reading the blinking time-series data input to the auxiliary storage device from the NRGS processing step to controlling the graphic blinking display device;

FIG. 211 is a figure blink sequence data file NS8 for reading and writing figure blink sequence data.
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of FIG.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram of the operation procedure of the blinking display execution control function NS7 for blinking the graphic blinking display device.

213] FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of the print function NS9. [FIG.

FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of the hard copy function NS10 for copying the image data of the edit screen displayed on the screen to the hard copy device.

FIG. 215 (A) is an explanatory diagram of an initial state of the figure blinking sequence data in a state in which the blinking time series data is read and the figure blinking sequence data is initialized, and FIG. It is a memory explanatory view of the initial state of the main memory device in the state where the figure blinking sequence data of the memory device is initialized.

FIG. 216 (A) is an explanatory diagram of an editing process of editing the graphic blinking sequence data of the initial state of the graphic blinking sequence data, and FIG. 216 (B) is
FIG. 9 is a memory explanatory diagram of the main memory device in an editing process in which the graphic blinking sequence data in the memory explanatory diagram of the initial state of the main memory device is edited.

217] FIG. 217 (A) shows blinking unitized data,
FIG. 217 (B) is a storage medium blinking state explanatory diagram showing blinking data written in each chip, which is a storage medium data division explanatory diagram for dividing into a sequence program storage medium formed from a plurality of chips. .

218] FIG. 218 is a data division multi-chip storage explanatory diagram in which blinking data is divided and stored in a plurality of chips forming a sequence program storage medium as an aggregate of figure blinking sequence data.

219] FIG. 219 is a data division multi-chip storage explanatory diagram in which blinking data and dimming data are divided and stored in a plurality of chips forming a sequence program storage medium as an aggregate of blinking sequence data. is there.

[Fig. 220] Fig. 220 is a storage medium blinking execution device relation diagram for reading the graphic blinking display device control data, outputting it to the medium data display control device, and executing blinking of the graphic blinking display device.

221] FIG. 221 is an NSEP upper functional hierarchy diagram in which only functions are extracted from the NSEP external connection functional diagram of FIG. 14. [FIG.

[FIG. 222] FIG. 222 is a system function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the system function NP1.

223] FIG. 223 is a setting function N of each condition at the time of editing panel blink sequence data and at the time of executing panel blink display.
It is a setting function hierarchy diagram which subdivided P2.

224] FIG. 224 is a blinking time-series data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking time-series data file function NP3.

FIG. 225 is a blinking unit coordinate figure data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the blinking unit coordinate figure data file function NP4.

FIG. 226 is a panel blinking sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (1/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blinking sequence data editing function NP5.

[FIG. 227] FIG. 227 is a panel blink sequence data editing function hierarchy diagram (2/2) showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blink sequence data editing function NP5.

[FIG. 228] FIG. 228 is a screen operation function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the screen operation function NP6.

229] FIG. 229 is a blinking display execution control function NP7.
It is a blinking display execution control function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions that have been subdivided.

[Fig. 230] Fig. 230 is a panel blink sequence data file function hierarchy diagram showing subordinate functions obtained by subdividing the panel blink sequence data file function NP8.

[FIG. 231] FIG. 231 is a print function hierarchy diagram showing a subordinate function obtained by subdividing a print function NP9 for printing panel blink sequence data or panel blink display device control data on a printer or outputting to a file.

232] FIG. 232 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram from reading the blinking time-series data input to the auxiliary storage device from the NRGS processing step to controlling the panel blinking display device.

233] FIG. 233 is an explanatory diagram of an operation procedure of a panel blinking sequence data file function NP8 for reading and writing panel blinking sequence data.

[FIG. 234] FIG. 234 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of a blinking display execution control function NP7 for blinking a panel blinking display device.

[FIG. 235] FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an operating procedure of the print function NP9.

236] FIG. 236 is an operation procedure explanatory diagram of the hard copy function NP10 for copying the image data of the edit screen displayed on the screen to the hard copy device.

[FIG. 237] FIG. 237 is a first embodiment of a blinking display panel of a panel blinking display device and panel blinking display device control data, and is a block diagram of a blinking unit light source of the blinking display panel and a configuration diagram of this blinking unit light source. It is a memory block diagram of the corresponding main memory device.

238] FIG. 238 is a blinking unit light source data explanation for explaining blinking unit light source data for blinking a display graphic corresponding to the graphic drawing of FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel of the first embodiment of FIG. 237. It is a figure.

239] FIG. 239 is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory of the main storage device that outputs the dot data of the blinking unit light source data explanatory diagram of FIG. 238 for each scene to turn on the blinking unit light source in a predetermined color. It is a figure.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the display data corresponding to the graphic drawing of FIG. 2 illuminated by the dot data of FIG. 238 and the lighting color data of each scene of FIG. 239;
It is a blinking display panel time series additional lighting figure which made the blinking unit light source light.

241] FIG. 241 shows the dot data of FIG. 238 and the lighting color data for each scene of FIG. 239 in order to light up and display the display graphic corresponding to the graphic drawing of FIG.
It is a display panel time series sequential lighting figure which makes a blinking unit light source light.

FIG. 242 is a second embodiment of the blinking display panel of the panel blinking display device and the panel blinking display device control data, and is a blinking unit light source configuration diagram of the blinking display panel and this blinking unit light source configuration diagram. It is a memory block diagram of the corresponding main memory device.

243 (A) is a blinking display panel time-series lighting diagram of scene 1 in which the blinking unit light source of the blinking unit light source configuration diagram of FIG. 242 is turned on in a predetermined color, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory diagram of the main storage device for turning on the blinking unit light source in a predetermined color.

244 (A) is a blinking display panel time-series lighting diagram of the scene 2 in which the blinking unit light source of the blinking unit light source configuration diagram of FIG. 242 is turned on in a predetermined color, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory diagram of the main storage device for turning on the blinking unit light source in a predetermined color.

245] FIG. 245 is a third embodiment of panel blinking display device control data for moving a display figure using the same blinking display panel as in FIG. 237, and is a blinking unit light source configuration diagram of the blinking display panel. FIG. 3 is a memory configuration diagram of a main storage device corresponding to the blinking unit light source configuration diagram.

246] FIG. 246 is a blinking / blinking unit for explaining dot data for blinking the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing of FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel of the third example of FIG. 245 while moving it. It is light source data explanatory drawing.

247] FIG. 247 is a blinking display panel time-series lighting memory of the main storage device that outputs the dot data of the blinking unit light source data explanatory diagram of FIG. 246 for each scene to turn on the blinking unit light source in a predetermined color. It is a figure.

[FIG. 248] FIG. 248 is a movement mode parameter for editing dot data for blinking while moving the display figure corresponding to the figure drawing of FIG. 2 on the blinking display panel shown in the third example of FIG. 245. FIG.

249 is a blinking display panel shown in the third embodiment of FIG. 245, in which a display figure corresponding to the figure drawing of FIG. 2 is added for each character while moving for each column of each character. 246 and the dot data of FIG. 246.
It is a blinking display panel time series additional lighting figure which made the blinking unit light source light according to the lighting color data for every scene of 7.

FIG. 250 is a block diagram of the blinking display panel shown in the third embodiment of FIG. 245, in which the display graphic corresponding to the graphic drawing of FIG. For this reason, the display panel time-series erasing lighting diagram in which the blinking unit light source is turned on by the dot data of FIG. 246 and the lighting color data of each scene of FIG. 247 is shown.

[FIG. 251] FIG. 251 shows that the blinking unit light source is turned on in order to move the display figure “A” in each column between time 1 and time 6 from scene 1 to immediately before scene 2 in FIG. 249. It is a display panel time series additional lighting diagram.

252 is a blinking unit in order to move the display figures “A” and “B” in columns from time 1 to time 6 from scene 2 to immediately before scene 3 in FIG. 249. It is a display panel time series additional lighting figure which turned on the light source.

[FIG. 253] FIG. 253 is from FIG.
From time 1 to time 6 until just before scene 6 of 50,
It is a display panel time series erasing lighting diagram in which a blinking unit light source is turned on in order to erase the character "A" in each column while moving the display figures "B" to "E" in each column.

[FIG. 254] FIG. 254 shows that while the display figure “E” is moved column by column during the time 1 to the time 6 from the scene 8 to the scene 9 in FIG. FIG. 7 is a time-series erase-on / off diagram of a display panel in which a blinking unit light source is turned on to erase each unit.

[FIG. 255] FIG. 255 shows that the blinking unit light source is turned on in order to erase the character “E” in each column from time 1 to time 6 from scene 9 to immediately before scene 10 in FIG. 250. It is a time series erasure lighting figure of a display panel.

[FIG. 256] FIG. 256 is time 1 to time 6 from the start of lighting of the first column of the display figure “A” to scene 1 of FIG. 249.
FIG. 8 is a display panel time-series additional lighting diagram in which the blinking unit light source is turned on in order to turn on and display the display figure “A” for each column of characters while moving and displaying the figure while moving.

257] FIG. 257 is a diagram showing the state between the time at which the scene 1 in FIG.
It is a display panel time-series additional lighting diagram in which the blinking unit light source is turned on in order to add and turn on the display figure “B” for each column of characters and display it while moving.

[Explanation of Codes] B02 Design B03 Physical Design Information B04 Graphic Drawing B06 Coordinate Graphic Data B06a Input Coordinate Graphic Data B06b Output Coordinate Graphic Data B07 Flashing Unitized Data B08 Flashing Unit Coordinate Graphic Data B10 Image Data B10a Input Image Data B10b Output Image Data B10c Video image data B10d Editing screen image data B11 Blinking time-series data B12 Blinking time-series transmission data B13 Graphic blink sequence data B14 Panel blink sequence data B15 Graphic blink display device control data B16 Panel blink display device control data B17 Screen display RGB Dot data B21 Display graphic B26 Unit coordinate graphic data B27 Blinking unit light source data (dot data) B28 Lighting color data C01 Coordinate input device C04 Image input device C06 Image output device C07 Flashing unit coordinate graphic data storage device C09 Flashing time series data storage device C11a Graphic flashing sequence data storage device C11b Panel flashing sequence data storage device C11f Video storage device C14 Flashing time series transmission data storage device C15 Time series graphic display Program storage device C17 Printing device (printer) C18 Drawing device (plotter) C19 Hard copy device C20 Display C21 First communication means C22 Second communication means C23 Sequence program generation device C24 Sequence program storage medium C26 Simulation display execution device C29 Graphic flashing display control device C30 Panel flashing display control device C31 Media data display control device C32 Flashing unit light source C33 Flashing display panel E05 Time series graphic display Program NCAD Flashing unit CAD program NRGS Flashing time series program NGEN Time series graphic display program generation program NDSP Simulation display control program NSEQ Graphic flashing display device control program NSEP Panel flashing display device control program NC1 Image input function NC2 Input image data interface NC3 paint function NC4 input coordinate figure data interface NC5 CAD function NC6 screen operation function NC7 file function NC8 communication function NC9 drawing output function NC10 print function NC11 hard copy function NR1 system function NR2 setting function NR3 screen operation function NR4 flashing unitized data file function NR5 Flashing time series data editing function NR6 Flashing time series transmission data editing function NR7 points Time-series data file function NR8 Flashing time-series transmission data file function NR9 Communication function NR10 Printing function NR11 Hard copy function NG1 Time-series graphic display sub-program generation function NG2 Translation / linkage editing function (time-series graphic display program generation function) NG3 file function NG4 communication function ND1 simulation display execution function ND2 time series graphic display program start function ND4 communication function ND5 hard copy function ND6 video interface NS1 system function NS2 setting function NS3 flashing time series data file function NS5 graphic flashing sequence data editing function NS6 screen operation function NS7 Flashing display execution control function NS8 Graphic flashing sequence data file function NS9 Printing function NS10 Hard copy function NP1 System function NP 2 Setting function NP3 Flashing time-series data file function NP4 Flashing unit coordinate figure data data file function NP5 Panel flashing sequence data editing function NP6 Screen operation function NP7 Flashing display execution control function NP8 Panel flashing sequence data file function NP9 Printing function NP10 Hard copy function

 ─────────────────────────────────────────────────── ─── Continuation of the front page (72) Inventor Eiichi Fukushima 3-43-3304 Nakatsu, Kita-ku, Osaka

Claims (14)

[Claims] 1. A blinking time series program processing step of inputting blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of a graphic and outputting blinking time series data for changing blinking display in time series, and the blinking time series data. And a graphic blinking display device control program processing step for outputting graphic blinking display device control data for controlling the graphic blinking display device or a pattern blinking sequence data to be recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the graphic blinking display device. A method for controlling the display of an advertising medium. 2. A blinking time series program processing step of inputting blinking unitized data specifying a blinking unit of a figure and outputting blinking time series data for changing blinking display in time series, and the blinking time series data. And panel blinking display device control data for controlling a panel blinking display device by inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data having unit coordinate graphic data obtained by uniting a coordinate graphic with the blinking unitized data and the blinking unitized data, or And a panel blinking display device control program processing step for outputting panel blinking sequence data recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the panel blinking display device. 3. A unit coordinate graphic data in which a coordinate graphic such as coordinate data of a pattern, physical pattern information, input coordinate graphic data, input image data, etc. is unitized by blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of the graphic, and A blinking unitized CAD program processing step of generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having blinking unitized data, and inputting the blinking unitized data to output blinking time series data for changing blinking display in time series A blinking time series program processing step for inputting the blinking time series data, and recording the figure blinking display device control data for controlling the figure blinking display device or the sequence program storage medium for controlling the figure blinking display device Table of advertising medium consisting of graphic blinking display device control program processing steps for outputting blinking sequence data Control method. 4. A unit coordinate graphic data in which a coordinate graphic such as coordinate data of a pattern, physical pattern information, input coordinate graphic data, input image data, etc. is unitized by blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of the graphic, and A blinking unitized CAD program processing step of generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having blinking unitized data, and inputting the blinking unitized data to output blinking time series data for changing blinking display in time series And a blinking time series program processing step for inputting the blinking time series data and the blinking unit coordinate figure data, and controlling the panel blinking display device control data for controlling the panel blinking display device or the sequence for controlling the panel blinking display device. Panel flashing to be recorded in the program storage medium Flashing panel to output sequence data Flashing display device control program Display control method of the advertisement media consisting of a ram processing steps. 5. A blinking time-series program processing step of inputting blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of a figure and outputting blinking time-series transmission data for changing a simulation display in time series, and the coordinate figure A time-series figure display program for generating a time-series figure display program for inputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having the unit coordinate figure data unitized by the blinking unitized data and the blinking unitized data, and displaying a simulation figure A display control method for an advertising medium, comprising: a generation program processing step; and a simulation display control program processing step of executing a simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. 6. A unit coordinate graphic data obtained by unitizing a coordinate graphic such as coordinate data of a pattern, physical pattern information, input coordinate graphic data, input image data, etc. by blinking unitized data specifying a blinking unit of the graphic, and A blinking unitized CAD program processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data having blinking unitized data, and blinking time series transmission data for inputting the blinking unitized data and changing the simulation display in time series. A blinking time-series program processing step for outputting, a time-series figure display program generation program processing step for generating a time-series figure display program for inputting the blinking unit coordinate figure data, and displaying a simulation figure, and the blinking With the time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program as input, the simulation Display control method of the advertisement media consisting of a simulated display control program processing step of executing Deployment display. 7. Blinking time-series transmission for inputting blinking unitized data specifying a blinking unit of a figure, outputting blinking time-series data for changing the blinking display in time series, and further for changing simulation display in time series. A blinking time series program processing step of outputting data, inputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having unit coordinate figure data obtained by uniting the coordinate figure by the blinking unitized data and the blinking unitized data, and simulating A program processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program for generating a time-series graphic display program for displaying a graphic, and a simulation display control program for executing a simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. Input the processing steps and the blinking time series data And a graphic blinking display device control program processing step for outputting graphic blinking display device control data for controlling the graphic blinking display device or pattern flashing sequence data to be recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the graphic blinking display device. Medium display control method. 8. A blinking time-series transmission for inputting blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of a figure, outputting blinking time-series data for changing the blinking display in time series, and further for changing the simulation display in time series. A blinking time series program processing step of outputting data, inputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having unit coordinate figure data obtained by uniting the coordinate figure by the blinking unitized data and the blinking unitized data, and simulating A program processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program for generating a time-series graphic display program for displaying a graphic, and a simulation display control program for executing a simulation display by inputting the blinking time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. Processing step, the blinking time series data and the Panel blinking display device that inputs the blinking unit coordinate figure data and outputs the panel blinking sequence data recorded in the sequence program storage medium for controlling the panel blinking display device control data or the panel blinking display device. A display control method for an advertising medium, which comprises a control program processing step. 9. Unit coordinate graphic data in which a coordinate graphic such as pattern coordinate data, physical pattern information, input coordinate graphic data, input image data, etc. is unitized by blinking unitized data for specifying blinking units of the graphic, and A blinking unitized CAD program processing step of generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate figure data having blinking unitized data, and inputting the blinking unitized data to output blinking time series data for changing blinking display in time series And a blinking time-series program processing step for outputting blinking time-series transmission data for further changing the simulation display in time series, and a time-series figure display program for inputting the blinking unit coordinate figure data and displaying a simulation figure A program processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program, and the blinking time-series transmission A simulation display control program processing step for executing a simulation display by inputting the data and the time-series graphic display program; and a graphic blinking display device control data for controlling the graphic blinking display device by inputting the flashing time-series data, or A method for controlling display of an advertising medium, which comprises a step of processing a program for controlling a graphic blinking display device for outputting graphic blinking sequence data recorded in a sequence program storage medium for controlling the graphic blinking display device. 10. Design coordinate data, physical design information,
Input coordinate graphic data, coordinate graphic such as input image data,
A blinking unitized CAD program processing step for generating and outputting blinking unit coordinate graphics data having unit coordinate graphics data unitized by the blinking unitized data for specifying blinking units of the graphic, and the blinking unitized data; Digitized data is input, the blinking time series data that changes the blinking display in time series is output, and the blinking time series transmission program processing step that outputs the blinking time series transmission data that changes the simulation display in time series, and A program processing step for generating a time-series graphic display program for inputting blinking unit coordinate graphic data to generate a simulation graphic display program, the flashing time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. As input, a simulation that performs a simulation display. Display control program processing step, panel blinking display device control data for controlling the panel blinking display device by inputting the blinking time series data and the blinking unit coordinate figure data, or a sequence program storage medium for controlling the panel blinking display device And a panel blinking display device control program processing step for outputting panel blinking sequence data to be recorded on the display medium. 11. The blinking time-series transmission data is stored in the blinking time-series transmission data storage device during the processing of the blinking time-series conversion program processing step for outputting the blinking time-series transmission data for changing the simulation display in time series. And a step of setting, after the end of the blinking time series program processing step,
Blinking unit coordinate figure data is input and the time series figure display program for displaying the simulation figure is generated. 5. The method according to claim 5, further comprising: a step of generating the time-series graphic display program; and a step of executing a simulation display by the blinking time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. The display control method for an advertising medium according to claim 8, 9 or 10. 12. A unit coordinate graphic data unitized coordinate graphic by starting a program processing step for generating a time series graphic display program for generating a time series graphic display program for displaying a simulation graphic by the second computer. From the first computer, the step of transmitting the blinking time-series transmission data from the first computer to the second computer through the first communication means, and the second computer causing the blinking 9. The display control method for an advertisement medium according to claim 5, 7 or 8, further comprising the step of executing a simulation display with time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. 13. A step of transmitting blinking unit coordinate graphic data from a first computer to a second computer via a second communication means, and a time series graphic display program for causing the second computer to display a simulation graphic. And a step of generating the time-series figure display program from the unit coordinate figure data obtained by unitizing the coordinate figure by starting the program processing step for generating the time-series figure display program; A step of transmitting the blinking time-series transmission data to the second computer through the communication means, and a step of causing the second computer to execute a simulation display by the blinking time-series transmission data and the time-series graphic display program. Display of the advertising medium according to claim 6 or claim 9 or claim 10 Control method. 14. The blinking unit coordinate graphic data includes blinking unitized data for specifying a blinking unit of a graphic including a unit number or a unit number and a group number, and a color, a pattern, a line type, a line width and a segment. The display control method for an advertising medium according to claim 3, claim 4 or claim 6, claim 9 or claim 10, wherein the coordinate figure is unit coordinate figure data unitized by the blinking unitized data.